HomeMy WebLinkAboutCU-NCP Standard Technical Specifications Rev4 Assembled
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
NETWORK CONNECTIVITY PROGRAM (NCP)
STANDARD TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
MEP ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECT
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
64 SOUTH STREET
AUBURN, NY 13021
TEL: (315) 253-7301
FAX: (315) 253-7306
Rev 4
TECHNOLOGY CONSULTANTS
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
115 Metro Park
Rochester, NY 14623
Tel: (585) 424-1952
Fax: (585) 424-4239
ARCHITECHNOLOGY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
March 29, 2012
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMO
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 81 00 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
07 84 13 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09 22 16 NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD
09 65 36 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 65 37 ANTISTATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 22 13 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESION
21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 13 16 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 01 00 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
23 01 01 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION
ARCHITECHNOLOGY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
March 29, 2012
23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 23 HYDRONIC PIPING
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PUMPS
23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
23 33 16 FIRE DAMPERS
23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 81 26 SPLITSYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS
23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 01 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
26 01 01 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
26 05 26 GROUNDING
26 05 53 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
26 29 10 MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS
26 51 00 LIGHTING
26 60 00 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIERMENTS
27 05 28 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
27 05 53 TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION
27 11 00 TELECOMMUNCATIONS ROOMS AND SPACES
27 13 00 BACKBONE CABLING
27 15 00 HORIZONTAL CABLING
DIVISION 28 SAFTEY AND SECURITY
28 07 10 SECURITY MANAGMENT SYSTEM
28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 - PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division-01 General Requirements
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them
off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and
reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver
them to Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare
them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed
and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged,
or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting
and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's
on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be
interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and
means of egress.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 - PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing
building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste
removal from building.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification
regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and
disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, Review
methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
2. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on
substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.
3. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires
protection.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective
demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not
be disrupted.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings
before proceeding with selective demolition.
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,
do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove
hazardous materials under a separate contract.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,
do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove
hazardous materials under a separate contract.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 - PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be
selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is
on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations
where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing
hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and
protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition
operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to
determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict
with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure
the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain
and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions
specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap
off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas
to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned,
before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 - PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that
maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or
plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be
removed with removal of the wall.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and
debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection
products and measures to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent
buildings, adjacent finishes and utilities/facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective
demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new
construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and
interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to
remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Provide clean room type walk-off sticky protective floor mats at
entrances/exit to Telecommunications Rooms during demolition,
reconstruction and finishing operations. Mats shall have at least 40 tear
off adhesive sheets and be a minimum of 40” long – to help remove dirt,
dust, grit, and contaminants from soles and wheels - on contact.
5. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been
removed.
6. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating,
and cooling specified in Division 01, Section 015000 - "Temporary
Facilities and Controls."
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural
supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement,
or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected
or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of
selective demolition.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent
required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to
complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 - PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower
level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier
before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to
remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools
designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to
avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify
condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting
operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable
materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method
suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials
so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended
reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of
containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation
requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections,
supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional
for use indicated.
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against
damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect,
items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during
selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after
selective demolition operations are complete.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 02 41 19 - PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with
construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then
remove concrete between saw cuts.
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with
construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry
between saw cuts.
C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then
break up and remove.
D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings
by one of the methods recommended by RFCI.
E. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing
refrigerants.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged,
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove
demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-
approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas.
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other
device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
3.7 CLEANING
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing
before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 1 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain
percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits
stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed
in the completed Work.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with
requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other
means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal
dimensions.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required
to produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and
hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of
natural sand or crushed stone.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 2 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100
percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
F. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or
ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches
(407 mm) o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m).
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or
truss type with single pair of side rods.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made
from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60
(Z180) zinc coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M,
Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch-
(9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and
with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out
of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication].
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or
other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 3 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a
preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate
proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.
Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another
type is indicated.
1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S .
2. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of
Type N.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or
coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602
for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as
measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping
systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other
Sections.
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry.
After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction
immediately adjacent to opening.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 4 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven
saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before
laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces
and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus
1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by
more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12
mm) total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by
more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and
reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3
m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch
(12 mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs,
reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more
than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or
1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12
mm) maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by
more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12
mm).
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent
courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 5 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with
uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-
type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units,
particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed
masonry in running bond ; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch
(100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond . Bond and
interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less
than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or
jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each
course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean
masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and
other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless
otherwise indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,
place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and
rod mortar or grout into core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing
plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of
solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of
partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and
push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance
between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches
o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small
pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load
deflection of structure above approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of
structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint
Systems."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 6 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal
to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and
pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting
course on footings.
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at
starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter
ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not
deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer
larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied
finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a
minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13
mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation
walls and parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below
wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings[ in
addition to continuous reinforcement].
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity
at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other
special conditions.
3.7 LINTELS
A. Provide concrete lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12
inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size
units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 7 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless
otherwise indicated.
3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as
needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed
masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of
mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and
shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be
placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts
and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum
pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained,
or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units
to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence
of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep
holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners,
openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance.
Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry
brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed
masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and
nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel
uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of
sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with
cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or
polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 04 22 00 – PAGE 8 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-
2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
END OF SECTION 422200
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 - PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 General Requirements Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Wood furring and grounds.
3. Plywood backboards and backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5
inches nominal in least dimension.
C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include
the following:
1. NELMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application
details.
1. Provide submittal product data and for wood-preservative treatment from
chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that
treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative
used and net amount of preservative retained.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 - PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum
allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and
design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review..
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of
engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no
grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable
rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide
lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect
and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by
DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated,
they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or
evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for
Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with
allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or
exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and
demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that
is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water
may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 - PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do
not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for
untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by
the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed
members in contact with masonry or concrete.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or
attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber
with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content
and[ any of] the following species and grades:
1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;
Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3
grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to
eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut
lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of
other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with
no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 - PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, ACX-
grade, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal
thickness. Paint all surfaces and edges of plywood with 2 coats fire retardant
paint, Benjamin Moore, super spec, HP latex flat, fire retardant paint or approved
equal. Color light gray.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with
requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-
preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with
hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2. For Plywood Backboards Panels for Telecommunications Equipment Rooms,
counter sink wood to provide recessed anchor heads. Also refer to
Architectural Partition Detail Drawing, typical.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex
nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated
below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load
imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488
conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to
line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as
needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar
supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 - PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing
materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for
fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities.
E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with
installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with
defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use
with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of
preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid
water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid
water.
G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners (NOTE: Do not use powder
activated fastening systems on campus in occupied buildings)
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
H. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that
will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise
indicated.
I. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of
members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts
flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ROUGH CARPENTRY
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 06 10 00 - PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking,
install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-
beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring
face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds
when no longer required.
END OF SECTION 061000
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 1 of 8
March 29, 2013
SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product
manufacturer.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer
indicating the following:
1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.
2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible
with existing SFRM, substrate primers and coatings.
3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by a qualified testing agency, for proposed SFRM.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM.
G. Field quality-control test reports.
H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise
qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained
staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.
A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer
engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by
Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified
requirements for performance and test methods.
1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the
applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 2 of 8
March 29, 2013
2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with
laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise
identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of
accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water
overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the
independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during
preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description
of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified
performance and test methods.
1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength
indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than
minimum specified in Part 2.
2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field
experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with
SFRM.
E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's
"Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined
according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E,
Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact
and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer,
date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings
applicable to Project.
B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from
Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready
for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated
materials.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 3 of 8
March 29, 2013
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work
specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:
1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying
operations and protect the environment.
2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and
other damage likely to occur during construction operations
subsequent to its application.
3. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers,
supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in
place.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and
by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified
requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by
occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to
environmental conditions other than those investigated and
approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not
reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCEALED SFRM
A. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, or either of the
following:
1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of
gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral
or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a
slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
2. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry
formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives
conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with
water at spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied product.
B. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher
values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per
standard test methods referenced with each property as follows:
1. Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) for average and individual
densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings
indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 4 of 8
March 29, 2013
2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance
design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than
0.375 inch (9 mm), per ASTM E 605:
a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1
inch (25 mm) or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness
of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch (6 mm).
b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of
less than 1 inch (25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9 mm), the
minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of
0.375 inch (9 mm) or 75 percent of the design thickness.
c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-
resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established
at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m).
3. Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736
based on laboratory testing of 0.75-inch (19-mm) minimum thickness
of SFRM.
4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. (35.9 kPa) minimum per
ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch
(19 mm) and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less
than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m).
5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination
per ASTM E 760.
8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in
24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness
of SFRM is 0.75 inch (19 mm), maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft.
(240 kg/cu. m), test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically
induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours.
9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per
ASTM G 21.
C. Compatibility: Provide a product tested by manufacturer for compatibility
with existing SFRM.
2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with
SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in
fire-resistance designs indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 5 of 8
March 29, 2013
B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-
resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the
following requirements:
1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's
"Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of
bond tests per ASTM E 736.
2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-
response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by
manufacturer of SFRM.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting
performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies
with the following:
1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the
substrate and related materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling
compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers,
incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign
substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with
substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers,
support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to
substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other
suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive
material.
B. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and
other related work are completed.
C. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written
recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable
of interfering with bond.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-
resistive materials during application.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 6 of 8
March 29, 2013
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive
material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill
scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer
unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory
condition to receive SFRM.
D. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface
imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished
surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would
telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for
mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to
mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive material, as applicable to particular
conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings
indicated.
B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1
"Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect
to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling,
water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results.
C. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive
material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as
recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application
indicated.
D. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each
substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by
SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single
course.
E. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following
the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel
application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM
manufacturer.
3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM
A. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those
required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition,
but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2
"Concealed SFRM" Article.
B. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as
required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating[ and where indicated].
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 7 of 8
March 29, 2013
C. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D. Apply sealer to concealed SFRM[ where indicated].
E. Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM[ where indicated].
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each
report whether tested work complies with or deviates from
requirements.
B. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of
SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using
methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next
area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show
compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values
indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft.
(93-sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4
measurements from a 144-sq. in. (0.093-sq. m) sample area, with
sample width of not less than 6 inches (152 mm) per ASTM E 605.
2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25
percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a
single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7
measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At
frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of
each type of construction and structural framing member, per
ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method."
4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing
Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area, or partial area, on
each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated
for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural
framing member, per ASTM E 736.
a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange,
structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will
exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material.
b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or
otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond
tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond
strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not
less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) minimum per ASTM E 736.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP APPLIED FIREPROOFING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 81 00 – PAGE 8 of 8
March 29, 2013
5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with
requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional
random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.
C. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and
inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as
specified above.
D. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test
results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements,
and retest as specified above.
3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each
containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from
surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove
evidence of soiling.
B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer,
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire
protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to
cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds,
inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas.
D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
END OF SECTION 078100
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 - PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 General Requirements
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls and floors.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each specific product proposed for use.
B. Division 27 Prime Contractor shall also refer to Section 270500 - Basic
Electrical/Communication Requirements, for additional requirements as they
relate to Telecommunications specific means, methods and acceptable
design make products.
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include
location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing
and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration
firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked,
approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection
engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-
rated assembly.
D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has
been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global
according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been
evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor
Program Requirements."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 - PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration
firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful
performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff,
and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on buyer.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when
ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration
firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written
instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate,
forced-air circulation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that
penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to
accommodate penetration firestopping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Hilti Corporation.
2. RectorSeal Corporation (Bio-Fireshield)
3. Specified Technologies Inc.
4. 3M Fire Protection Products.
5. USG Corporation.
B. Provide the products of only one manufacturer throughout the project.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 - PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
1. At a minimum these need to conform to Div 27 05 00 acceptable
manufacturers.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke
and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction
penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one
another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration
firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on
testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls
and fire partitions.
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a
positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling
membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of
a wall.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per UL 1479.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of
penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and
elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system
that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use
only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer
and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping
indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 - PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.
2. Temporary forming materials.
3. Substrate primers.
4. Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-
in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with
an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the
sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify
after cure during exposure to moisture.
-- Generally suitable for Division 27 conduit.pathways work --
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel
and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-
faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties
containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
-- Generally suitable for Division 27 cabling related work --
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets
with aluminum foil on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders,
hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with
water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber
cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble
expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover
openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being
easily removed.
-- Generally suitable for Division 27 cabling work --
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when
mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 - PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing
elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and
other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical
and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag
grade for both opening conditions.
2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with
penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate
proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or
procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing
penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and with the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items
foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration
firestopping.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration
firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer
using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed
surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the
Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 07 84 13 - PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as
soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's
written installation instructions and published drawings for products and
applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce
cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove
combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as
permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,
accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance
ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by
openings and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish
to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by
penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in
which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation
that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at
time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce
systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078413
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 1 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 08 11 13 -- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal
thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and
exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed
and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 2 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection
during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished
units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of
frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units
maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum
4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps
excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit
air circulation.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field
measurements before fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such
items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with minimum A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G)
coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 3 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as
measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-
lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-
development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded
for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive
compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious
impurities.
2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1. Design: Flush panel .
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, mineral-
board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise
ratings indicated.
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-)
thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard
Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless
metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements
indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty 18 GA.), Model 2
(Seamless).
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with
reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 4 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and
profile.
B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet 16
GA..
4. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-16 GA) thick steel sheet.
5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. Same
as adjacent door frame.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with
reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame
size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated
straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or
wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum
3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide
pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to
frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch
(1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive
fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension
clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate
bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
2.5 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as
specified for adjoining hollow metal work.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick,
fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 5 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of
5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick,
fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C,
with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- ((0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel
sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.
1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted V-shaped or
Y-shaped blades.
2. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Louvers constructed with movable blades
closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in fire-rated door
assemblies of type and fire-resistance rating indicated by same testing and
inspecting agency that established fire-resistance rating of door assembly.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid
mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch
(0.4 mm) thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for
thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's
plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot
be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 .
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water
penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and
make smooth, flush, and invisible.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 6 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no
visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame.
Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames
to be grouted.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least
four spot welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813
mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm)
high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm)
high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm)
high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813
mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide
and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches
(152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26
inches (660 mm) o.c.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door
silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from
either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 7 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified
in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to
ANSI/SDI A250.8 .
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-
mounted door hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and
ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for
hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections
with Division 26 Sections.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline
joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side
of hollow metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so
that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of
interior doors and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of
glazing and type of installation indicated.
2.10 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended
by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-
applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 8 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed
finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for
squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a
line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners
of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
perpendicular line from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-
mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 .
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of
opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames
have been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are
constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends
to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 9 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling
space between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout.
Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not
deformed or damaged by grout forces.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors,
and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet
on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a
horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face
corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within
clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5
mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):
Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105 .
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing"
and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced
uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches
(50 mm) o.c. from each corner.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 11 13 – PAGE 10 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately
before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped,
bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately
after installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or
damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-
inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 - PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finished flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for
hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and
edge construction and trim for openings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of
each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location
and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by
10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm),
with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber
required.
b. Provide samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic
laminate required.
c. Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for
factory-finished doors.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 - PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with
WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. Provide WI-Certified Compliance Certificate indicating that doors comply
with requirements of grades specified.
2. Provide WI-Certified Compliance Certificate for installation.
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-
84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch
in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 - PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
B. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as
needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated on drawings.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals
concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
2. Species: White oak.
3. Cut: Rotary cut.
4. Core: Particleboard.
5. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then
entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with
clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate
hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and
hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions
and alignment before factory machining.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other
required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified. Seal all four
edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 - PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing.
Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for
hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains
and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and
mortises.
B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: WI System 5 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: Semi-filled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to
partially fill the wood pores.
5. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,
location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level
heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to
NFPA 80.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or
machining is required at Project site.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 - PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with
requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FLUSH WOOD DOORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16 - PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 - PAGE 1 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 08 31 13 -- ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of access door and frame indicated.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and
profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and
frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that
are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-
response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and
labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction:
1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-
size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 - PAGE 2 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying
with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
C. Steel Sheet: electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled
steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel (CS), exposed.
D. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other
contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if
present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1,
"White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of
prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's
written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
E. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated
steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of
gypsum board.
F. Plaster Beads: Casing bead formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated
steel sheet with flange formed out of expanded metal lath and in size to suit
thickness of plaster.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering fire-rated products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 - PAGE 3 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire-rated
products by one of the following:
1. Design Make: The William Bros. Corporation of America - WB FR 800
Series, with automatic closure, smoke seal and mortised lock, or equal.
2. Karp Associates, Inc.
3. Milcor Inc.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide non-rated
products by one of the following:
1. Design Make: The Nystrom Corporation - WB FR 800 Series, with
automatic closure, smoke seal and mortised lock, or equal.
2. Karp Associates, Inc.
3. Milcor Inc.
D. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel
sheet.
1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal, set flush with
exposed face flange of frame.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) Insert dimension thick sheet
metal with 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) wide, surface-mounted trim.
4. Hinges: Continuous piano.
5. Latch: Slam latch operated by flush key with interior release.
6. Lock: Cylinder.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as
integral units ready for installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use
materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,
or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent
surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to
secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm) wide around
perimeter of frame.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush,
smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 08 31 13 - PAGE 4 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors
and frames.
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish
material.
C. Install swing-down hinged doors with hinge closest to an adjacent wall, so
that an open door in a ceiling less than 8’6” AFF, will not interfere with public
egress path and will minimize the likelihood for pedestrian injury. If this is not
possible, coordinate the review with Owner’s Representative, in advance of
rough opening.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged.
C. Clean dirt and finger prints from exposed finished.
D. Prepare assembly for painting. Prime and paint two finish coats to match
existing conditions. Finish Paint color and type to be determined by Owners
Facilities Department.
END OF SECTION 083113
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 - PAGE 1 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the
following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits,
furring, etc.).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product used, include MSDS as
applicable.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies
that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent
testing agency.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions
indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for
metal, unless otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 - PAGE 2 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip
galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
felt), non-perforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow
fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick,
in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded
hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance
with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and
spacing indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in
ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment
services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing
steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 - PAGE 3 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar
metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1. Space studs as follows:
a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full
height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except
where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue
framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural
supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent
axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on
door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and
secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a
minimum 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for
installation of control joint in finished assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to
underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the
same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install
framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door
heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-
resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make
partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated
assembly indicated.
D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces
vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of
adjacent framing.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP NON STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16 - PAGE 4 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
END OF SECTION 092216
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 1 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly
indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent
testing agency.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and
other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or
gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more
stringent.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 2 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize
joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as
applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more
stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. USG Corporation.
B. Type X:
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint
compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 3 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use
formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or
for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged
surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose
compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation
standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly
adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral
fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber
requirements of assembly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded
hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 4 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger
abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at
edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space
between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications
where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided
behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints
other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining
gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
(above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air,
or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less
than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside
of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by
structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to
install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at
structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-
mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where
edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each
panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control
joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters
and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above
acoustical ceilings.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 5 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless
blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Type X: All.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application
to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing),
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,
and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in
alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to
framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill
screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before
applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same
sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and
offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located
over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud
or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite
sides of partitions.
3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to
supports with screws.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 6 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing
with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual
joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having
flanges not intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and
according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other
Division 09 Sections.
3. Level 5: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss
paint finish.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other
Division 09 Sections.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction
period.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GYPSUM BOARD
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 29 00 - PAGE 7 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to,
fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 - PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 20132
SECTION 096536 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conductive vinyl composition floor tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts,
edges, columns, doorways, and seaming plan for sheet flooring.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor
tile required.
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq.
cm.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than
90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 - PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 20132
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces
to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every building, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed. Deliver to Owner’s field office.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Excelon 51903 Blue Gray.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches
F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 - PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 20132
2.2 BASE MATERIALS
A. Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset: top set Style
B, Cove and as follows:
1. Height: 6 inch.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from mfg. full range of colors.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
7. Manufacturers: Johnsonite, Inc. or equal.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland
cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or
approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
.B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended
by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere
with adhesion of floor tile.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 - PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 20132
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling
and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a
uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where
they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products
immediately before installation.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal
width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than
one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the
same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard
broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and
door frames.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 - PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 20132
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or
marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on
substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive
applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open
cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive
spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other
damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile with Ram Board Protective Card Board secured by
painters tape and one layer of hard board or equal - until substantial
completion by Div 23 and Division 27 Contractors.
E. After substantial completion by Division 27 Contractor, but prior to final
project closeout, strip factory wax and burn in two coats of wax. Refer to
Section 01 77 10 - Final Cleaning, as applicable.
F. Provide final cleaning – at final acceptance, as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 096536
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 36 - PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 20132
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 1 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 096537 – ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conductive vinyl composition floor tile.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts,
edges, columns, doorways, and seaming plan for sheet flooring.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor
tile required.
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq.
cm.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than
90 deg F Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 2 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces
to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every building, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed. Deliver to Owner’s field office.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Static Dissipative SDT.
B. Provide direct cement application over cured concrete.
C. Electrical Resistance ASTM F 150 25,000-1,000,000 ohms,.
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Thickness: 0.125 inch
F. Size: 12 by 12 inches
G. Manufacturer: Armstrong
H. Color: Blue/Gray 51903
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 3 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
I. Style: Standard Excelon
2.2 BASE MATERIALS
A. Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset: top set Style
B, Cove and as follows:
1. Height: 6 inch.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3. Finish: Satin.
4. Length: Roll.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from mfg. full range of colors.
6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.
7. Manufacturers: Johnsonite, Inc. or equal.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland
cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or
approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Static-Control Adhesive: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type that
maintains electrical continuity of floor-covering system to ground
connection.
1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a. VCT Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Public Health’s (formerly, the California
Department of Health Services) “Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
Sources Using Environmental Chambers”.
C. Grounding Strips: Provided or approved by manufacturer; type and size that
maintains electrical continuity of floor-covering system to ground
connection.
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, static-control liquid floor polish products as
recommended by floor-covering manufacturerer.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 4 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere
with adhesion of floor tile.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer.
Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass
testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling
and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a
uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where
they are to be installed.
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where
they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products
immediately before installation.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 5 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install static-control resilient flooring according to manufacturer’s written
instructions
B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend grounding
strips beyond perimeter of static-control resilient floor-covering surfaces
to ground connections.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit static-control resilient flooring to butt neatly and tightly
to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture,
cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
D. Install static-control resilient flooring on covers for telephone and
electrical ducts, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall
continuity of color and pattern with pieces of static-control resilient flooring
installed on covers. Tightly adhere static-control resilient flooring edges
to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
E. Adhere static-control resilient flooring to substrates using a full spread of
static-control adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed
installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
protection of floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile
installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other
damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile with Ram Board Protective Card Board secured by
painters tape and one layer of hard board or equal - until substantial
completion by Div 23 and Division 27 Contractors.
E. After substantial completion by Division 27 Contractor, but prior to final
project closeout. If recommended in writing by manufacturer, apply
protective static-control floor polish formulated to maintain or enhance
floor covering's electrical properties; ensure static-control resilient flooring
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 6 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
surfaces are free from soil, static-control adhesive, and surface
blemishes. Do not apply standard wax.
a. Verify that both floor polish and its application method are approved
by manufacturer and that floor polish will not leave an insulating film
that reduces static-control resilient flooring's effectiveness for static
control.
F. Provide final cleaning – at final acceptance, as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 096536
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ANTI-STATIC RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 65 37 - PAGE 7 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 1 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 099123 -- INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 General Requirements
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on the following interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Clay masonry.
3. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
4. Steel.
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
7. Plaster.
8. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
9. Cotton or canvas insulation covering.
10. Galvanized metal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of product used, include MSDS as
applicable.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI
Approved Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint
systems indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 2 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated
areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45
deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or
wet surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
3. Tamms Industries, Inc.
4. ChemRex.
5. AntiStatic Industries
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible
with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service
and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and
field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in
writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on
substrate indicated.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 BLOCK FILLERS
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 3 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2.5 LATEX PAINTS
A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5.
B. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5).
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3.
2.6 FLOOR COATINGS
A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.
2.7 INTERIOR ALKYD DRY FOG/FALL: MPI #55.
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an
electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 4 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of
substrates and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates
indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size
or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment
name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including
dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible
primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds,
efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or
alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
E. Clay Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint
surfaces if moisture content of surfaces or alkalinities of mortar joints to be
painted exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not
paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from
galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to
produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently
applied paints.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 5 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
I. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying
primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty
or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing
compound is dry and sanded smooth.
K. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured
and dry.
L. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
M. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and
other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers,
and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats
until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and
refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 6 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
3.5 PAINTING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL and COMMUNICATION WORK:
A. Paint items exposed in equipment rooms, new Telecommunication
Rooms and other occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Architectural Work:
a. Newly exposed, existing wall and existing deck surfaces in each
new Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint,
EVEN if not called for on the drawings.
b. All existing and new wall surfaces in each new
Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint,
EVEN if not called for on the drawings.
c. All existing and new suspended ceiling surfaces in each new
Telecommunication Rooms. Clean, patch, prime and paint,
EVEN if not called for on the drawings.
2. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas
insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish
for field painting.
f. Paint new and existing exposed duct occurring in new
Telecommunication Rooms, even if not indicated on the AMEP
plans. Clean and prime existing as called for.
3. Electrical and Communication Work:
a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish
for field painting.
b. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished
areas.
c. Paint new and existing: exposed electrical, exposed communication
conduit exposed plywood and exposed electrical equipment occurring
in new Telecommunication Rooms, even if not indicated on the AMEP
plans. Clean and prime existing as called for.
B. Paint shop-primed equipment.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical
and electrical components and paint separately.
D. Prime and paint interior and exterior insulated and exposed pipes, conduit,
boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports,
except where items are prefinished.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 7 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Exposed Conduit, Surface Mounted Boxes, Exposed Pullboxes, Exposed
Cable Tray and raceways: As called for on the Drawings.
F. Refer to Telecommunications drawings for additional specifics of painting of
conduits, cable trays and telecom equipment.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G.
a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based).
B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1M.
a. Prime Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
C. Clay-Masonry Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.1M.
a. Prime Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
D. CMU Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.2E.
a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
E. Steel Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S.
a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 8 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (semigloss).
F. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood.
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.4T.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
G. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
H. Plaster Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (eggshell).
I. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).
J. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct
coverings.
1. Latex System: MPI INT 10.1A.
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell).
K. Exposed Structural Ceilings Ferrous and Galvanized Metal:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 9 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Waterborne Acrylic Coating, Flat Finish with flash rust resistance and
low odor (White or Black only).
a. Primer: S-W Kem Bond HS on Steel if not factory primed.
b. First Coat: S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall (B42).
c. Second Coat: S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall (B42).
L. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 2.5 mils/coat.
a. Primer Coat: S-W Kem Kromik Universal Primer (B50Z).
b. First Coat: S-W DTM Acrylic Enamel (B66-100).
c. Second Coat: S-W DTM Acrylic Enamel (B66-100).
END OF SECTION 099123
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP INTERIOR PAINTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23 - PAGE 10 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
[ THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 102213 -- WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. As defined in ASTM E 2016:
1. Intermediate Crimp: Wires pass over one and under the next adjacent
wire in both directions, with wires crimped before weaving and with extra
crimps between the intersections.
2. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires
securely in place.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design wire mesh units, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
1. Include clearances required for operation of doors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wire mesh items with cardboard protectors on perimeters of panels
and doors and with posts wrapped to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Use vented plastic.
B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure
lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic
installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous
with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acorn Wire & Iron Works, Inc.
2. American Woven Wire Corporation.
3. California Wire Products Corporation.
4. Central Wire and Iron.
5. Donaldson, R. J., Inc.
6. Folding Guard Corporation.
7. G-S Company (The).
8. Indiana Wire Products, Inc.
9. Jesco Industries, Inc.
10. Kenco Wire and Iron Products Inc.
11. Kentucky Metal Products Co.
12. King Wire Partitions, Inc.
13. Lakeside Wire and Iron Company.
14. Miller Wire Works, Inc.
15. Newark Wire Works Inc.
16. Standard Wire & Steel Works.
17. Wire Crafters, LLC.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Wire: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
E. Square Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed structural-steel tubing.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with G60 (Z180) zinc (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy
(galvannealed) coating designation.
G. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and
washers.
H. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure,
load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5
(0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2
(ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4), for bolts and nuts;
ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.
3. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed.
4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed.
I. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated and fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials; with
clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by wire mesh construction, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
J. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal
modified-alkyd primer, complying with MPI#79.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from
zinc-rich primer.
2.3 STANDARD-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
A. Mesh: 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven
into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) diamond mesh.
B. Vertical Panel Framing: 1-1/4-by-5/8-by-0.097-inch (32-by-16-by-2.5-mm)
cold-rolled, C-shaped steel channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter bolt
holes spaced not more than 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. along center of framing.
C. Horizontal Panel Framing: 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) cold-
rolled steel channels.
D. Horizontal Panel Stiffeners: 2 cold-rolled steel channels, not less than 1 by
3/8 by 1/8 inch (25 by 9.5 by 3 mm), bolted or riveted toe to toe through mesh
or 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) cold-rolled steel channels with
wire woven through.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
E. Top Capping Bars: 2-1/4-by-1-inch (57-by-25-mm) cold-rolled steel channels.
F. Line Posts: 3-inch-by-4.1-lb (76-mm-by-1.9-kg) or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4-by-0.127-
inch (89-by-32-by-3.2-mm) steel channels; with 5-by-18-by-1/4-inch (125-by-
450-by-6-mm) steel base plates punched for attachment to floor.
G. Floor Shoes: Steel, cast iron, or cast aluminum, not less than 2 inches (50
mm) high; sized to suit vertical framing, drilled for attachment to floor, and
with set screws for leveling adjustment.
H. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing
fabricated from 1-1/4-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (32-by-13-by-3-mm) steel channels
or C-channels, banded with 1-1/4-by-1/8-inch (32-by-3-mm) flat steel bar
cover plates on [3] [4] sides, and with 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick angle strike bar
and cover on strike jamb.
1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-by-3-inch (76-by-76-mm) steel, 1-1/2 pairs
per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing.
2. Padlock Lug: Mortised into door framing and enclosed with steel cover.
3. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with manufacturer's standard cylinder;
operated by key outside and recessed turn knob inside.
I. Accessories:
1. Sheet Metal Base: Not less than 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled
steel sheet.
2. Adjustable Filler Panels: Not less than 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, cold-
rolled steel sheet; capable of filling openings from 2 to 12 inches (50 to
300 mm).
3. Wall Clips: Manufacturer's standard, cold-rolled steel sheet; allowing up
to 1 inch (25 mm) of adjustment.
J. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Baked-enamel finish unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than
those indicated. Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire
mesh item manufacturer. As required for complete installation, provide bolts,
hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes.
1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled.
2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no
evidence of joint.
B. Standard-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with
cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of
cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing.
2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction.
a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition
manufacturer. Weld horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing.
b. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting
adjacent panels.
3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with 3 inches (76 mm) of clear space
between finished floor and bottom horizontal framing.
4. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with
finished floor.
5. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels.
a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom
over door, fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels.
6. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing
as required to install hardware.
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable
standard listed below:
1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron components.
2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
3. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean wire
mesh components of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and
treat with metallic-phosphate process.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed
metal fabrications:
1. Ineriors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC_SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,
except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete
or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
D. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and
pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-on finish, suitable
for use indicated, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a
minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed.
C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support
fasteners.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION
A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter,
postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through anchor
clips located at each post and corner. Shim anchor clips as required to
achieve level and plumb installation.
1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter,
postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through floor
shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in
floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation.
1. Anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. through back
corner panel framing and as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion
shields and hanger or lag bolts.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS MARCH 29, 2013
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing
members.
4. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, use hanger or lag bolts set
into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to
locate backing members.
5. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies, fasten brackets directly to
steel framing or concealed reinforcements using self-tapping screws of
size and type required to support structural loads.
D. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)
diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches (700 mm) o.c.
E. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows:
1. On each side of sliding door openings.
2. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet (2.1 to 2.7 m) high, spaced at 15 to 20
feet (4.6 to 6.1 m) o.c.
3. For partitions that are 10 to 12 feet (3.0 to 3.7 m) high, located between
every other panel.
4. For partitions that are more than 12 feet (3.7 m) high, located between
each panel.
F. Where standard-width wire mesh partition panels do not fill entire length of
run, provide adjustable filler panels to fill openings.
G. Install doors complete with door hardware.
H. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.
Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage
accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are
warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the
same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for
touching up shop-painted surfaces.
D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 102213
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 1 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 211313 -- WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping
designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping
containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve.
Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened.
Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-
kPa) minimum working pressure.
B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), modifications including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler
Contractor, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a. Telecom Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
b. Corridor, Lobbies, General Offices: Light Hazard.
2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. or
entire area if less than 1500 sq. ft.
b. Light Hazard: 0.10 gpm over 1500 sq. ft, or entire area if less than
1500 sq. ft.
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.
4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a. Telecom Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m).
b. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless
otherwise indicated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 2 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to
NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:
a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 30 minutes.
b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 to 90
minutes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Equipment
a. Provide manufacturer’s catalog data for each separate piece of
equipment which indicates the name of the manufacturer of each item
of equipment, with data highlighted to indicate model, size, options, etc.
proposed for installation.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide layout drawing of
the complete automatic sprinkler system modifications indicating relationship
of all other items including HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, structural
members and all other significant items of all piping. Complete details and
sections as required to clearly define and clarify the design including details
of each type of riser assembly and pipe hangers.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction,
including hydraulic calculations if applicable.
F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13.
Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 3 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing
sprinkler system modifications and providing services needed to assume
engineering responsibility.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations,
and field test reports by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
B. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories,
installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler
service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager and/or Owner no fewer than two days in
advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction
Manager's written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that
penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Spare Sprinklers: Provide to Owner the number of sprinklers required by
NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include spares of each type of sprinkler
used on Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe
ends may be factory, shop fabrication or field formed to match joining method.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 4 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
C. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
D. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
H. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
I. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with
dimensions matching steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions.
Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and
nuts.
J. For buildings with existing sprinkler systems, which use galvanized steel
piping, new piping shall be galvanized
2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges:
Full-face gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 5 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Types: Angle, ball, and globe
2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 213.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
4. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
5. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections
as required to match connected branch piping.
7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
B. Adjustable Drop Nipples:
1. Standard: UL 1474.
2. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Length: Adjustable.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
2.5 SPRINKLERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
B. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 6 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge
Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
3. For buildings with existing sprinkler systems, provide the same make and
model sprinkler heads that are used in the building.
C. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.
3. Factory painted finish where required to match existing.
D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following
sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and semi-
recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or Chrome-plated
steel, two piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment or Plastic, white
finish, one piece, flat.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel or Plastic, white finish, either
one or two piece.
E. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
2.6 DRY SPRINKLER ASSEMBLY
A. Dry sprinkler assembly shall be of the sidewall type as indicated. Assembly
shall include an integral escutcheon. Maximum length shall not exceed
maximum indicated in UL Fire Prot Dir. Sprinklers shall have a polished
chrome finish.
2.7 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipe Sleeves: Cast of fabricated of cast iron and equivalent to
ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized –Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6 mm) minimum thickness,
round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 7 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
2.8 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000 psi (34-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factor packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as
indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written
approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with
Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping
in NFPA 13.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
E. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to
NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
F. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings.
G. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings.
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have
finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating
for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes and
fittings before assembly.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 8 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
E. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
F. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install drain valves according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of
acoustical ceiling panels.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL-NCP WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 13 – PAGE 9 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
END OF SECTION 211313
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 1 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 211316 - DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping
designed to operate at working pressure 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping
containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air
and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water then flows into
piping and discharges from sprinklers that are open.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-
kPa) minimum working pressure.
B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s) modifications, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler
Contractor, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a. Modify existing Pipe Schedule System in compliance with pipe sizes
for Ordinary Hazard Pipe Schedule for ITR, electric, and storage
rooms. Use light hazard pipe schedule for offices and corridors.
2. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.
3. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to
NFPA 13.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Provide manufacturer’s
catalog data for each separate piece of equipment which indicates the name
of the manufacturer of each item of equipment, with data highlighted to
indicate model, size, options etc., proposed for installation.
B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide layout drawing of
the complete automatic sprinkler system modifications indicating relationship
of all other items including HVAC equipment, lighting fixtures, structural
members, and all other significant items. Clearly indicate elevations and
pitch of all piping. Complete details and sections as required to clearly define
and clarify the design including details of each type of pipe hanger.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 2 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data by the
qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor responsible for their preparation.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Furnish NFPA 13 test
reports.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Spare Sprinklers: Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and
sprinkler wrench.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing
sprinkler systems and providing design services needed to assume
engineering responsibility.
a. Design Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and
field test reports by a qualified licensed Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
B. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories,
installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler
service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager and/or Owner no fewer than two days in
advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction
Manager's and/or Owner's written permission.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that
penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 3 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Spare Sprinkler: Provide to Owner the number of sprinklers required by
NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include spares of each type of sprinkler
used on Project.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Standard Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E,
Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory, fabrication shop, or field formed to
match joining method.
B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
C. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
D. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
G. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with
dimensions matching steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213,
rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions.
Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and
nuts.
2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. General Requirements:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 4 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Types: Angle, Ball, and Globe.
2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. General Requirements for Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe
service.
B. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Standard: UL 213.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.
4. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
5. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch
outlets.
6. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections
as required to match connected branch piping.
7. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
C. Branch Line Testers:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
3. Body Material: Brass.
4. Size: Same as connected piping.
5. Inlet: Threaded.
6. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.
7. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
2.5 SPRINKLERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval
Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
B. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with discharge
coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating
unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
C. Sprinkler Finishes: Match existing finishes
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.
D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following
sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for flush, and recessed-type
sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 5 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or Chrome-plated
steel, two piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment.
2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel or one piece.
E. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Standard: UL 199.
2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as
indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written
approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for installation of
sprinkler piping.
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
D. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on
valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end
connections.
E. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
F. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to
NFPA 13. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
G. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
H. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure
maintenance devices and air compressors.
I. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls and ceilings.
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and
special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than
system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on
valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end
connections.
C. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 6 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, and
fittings before assembly.
E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts
according to ASME B31.9.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
G. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe
according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket,
lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to
AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install trim and drain valves according to NFPA 13 and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to
requirements in NFPA 13.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems
Acceptance" Chapter.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 21 13 16 – PAGE 7 of 7
MARCH 29, 2013
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
END OF SECTION 21 13 16
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 1 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 230100 -- MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DIVISION 23 - DESCRIPTION:
The Technical Specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of
the Owner and Contractor into divisions of work. The Work of Division 23,
Mechanical, is further described in Specification Sections of the 23 00 00 Series
and Contractor Contract Drawings of the "M" and “AMEP” series.
The organization of this Work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime Contractor
from providing all of the work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified
in the complete set of Specifications, whether or not the individual subcontractors
correctly identify their respective responsibilities.
1.2 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK:
To the extent that the Work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other
trades, the Contractor for this division shall adhere to the requirements of other
Specification Sections. All General Construction work shall be performed in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 02 through Division 26
Sections.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide Mechanical Basic Materials and Methods
B. Provide Access Doors or Access Panels
C. Provide Fire Wall Sealant
D. Provide Hangers, Riser Clamps, Attachments and Rods
E. Provide Identification Systems
F. Provide Sleeves
G. Provide Miscellaneous Painting
H. Provide Equipment Installation
I. Provide Firestop to Restore Penetrations and Smoke/Fire Barrier
Assemblies
J. Provide Noise and Vibration Free Installation
K. Provide Adjustment and Initial Lubrication
L. Provide Maintenance of systems in good condition until final acceptance.
M. Provide Permits and Inspections.
N. Provide Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (pre and post construction)
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 2 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS:
Division 23 shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of
all permits and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction for the work
of Division 23. Division 23 shall pay all fees associated with these permits and
inspections.
1.5 LAWS AND REGULATIONS:
Division 23 shall conform with all Federal, State, County, and Municipal Laws,
Ordinances and Regulations. Comply with the Occupational Safety and Health
Act (OSHA).
1.6 CONTRACTOR EXAMINATION OF THE SITE:
It shall be the responsibility of each prospective Contractor to visit the project site
and to examine existing conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible to
include under this Division all effort, materials, supplies, temporary installations
and other work to relocate, remove or modify existing work as required to
complete the work of this Division.
1.7 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the complete
project documents including Plans and Specifications thoroughly prior to
bid and to notify the Architect/Engineer of any uncertainties or apparent
omission, conflicts, or discrepancies between the Plans and
Specifications. In any case of a conflict between the Plans and
Specifications or between two Specification sections it shall be assumed
that the larger capacity or quantity, or higher quality, shall govern until a
determination can be made by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Plans and Specifications are of abbreviated form. Omitted words or
phrases shall be inferred.
C. Plans and Specifications are complementary. Provide all work which is
either shown or specified or both.
D. Where provided on the drawings, typical details shall be assumed to be
applied to each installation of the equipment whether or not specifically
identified at each point in the Plans.
E. The Division 23 Contractor shall assume that all work on the Mechanical
Drawings is included in his work unless specifically noted otherwise.
1.8 DEFINITIONS:
Where used in the Plans and Specifications the following words and
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 3 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
corresponding definitions shall apply:
MSS: Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
Inc.
Provide - Contractor shall supply, install, start-up, and maintain until final
acceptance.
Furnish - Same definition as Provide.
New- Work occurring as part of this Project, usually employed on a drawing to
distinguish from existing work. All work shown on the drawings shall be assumed
to be new unless specifically identified as existing.
Exist - Existing work.
Shown - Shown on the Plans.
Specified - Specified on the Technical Specifications.
HV - The Contractor performing the Division 23 - Heating and Ventilation work.
In the Plans and Specifications, the works "By Div 23" and "By HV" or "By H&V"
shall be considered synonymous.
Elect or EC - the Contractor performing the Division 23 work. In the Plans and
Specifications, the work "By Div 26", "By EC" and "By Elect" shall be considered
synonymous.
Plumb or Plumbing or - Plg - The Contractor performing the Division 23 -
Plumbing work. In the Plans and Specifications, the words "By Plumb" or "By
Plumbing" or "By Plg" shall be considered synonymous.
FP - The Contractor performing the Division 23 - Fire Protection. In the Plans
and Specifications, the words "By Div 23 - FP" or "By FP" shall be considered
synonymous.
1.9 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A. Cost of water and electricity for construction by Cornell University.
B. Electrical connections by Electrical Contractor specifically shown in their
Contract. The Division 26 Contractor is responsible only for the electrical
connections included under Division 26 and the electrical drawings.
Division 23 Contractor shall provide all other electrical work necessary for
satisfactory operation of equipment furnished under Division 23.
1.10 REGULATIONS GOVERNING ASBESTOS:
A. The Owner has reported that he has investigated the project site for
asbestos containing materials and has scheduled remediation activities if
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 4 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
required. This does not guarantee that the site is 100% asbestos free.
B. If any material which appears to possibly contain asbestos is
encountered, the Contractor shall:
C. Conform to the procedures identified in Section 01 35 23 – Owner Safety
Requirements’ (especially, but not limited too, Paragraph 1.3).
D. Refer to Section 011000 – Summary of Work, item 1.5 - Work By Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS:
A. Size 24” x 24” unless otherwise noted. It is to be noted that various type
frame are required for specific wall and ceiling finish. Any door having an
area exceeding 324 square inches shall have two (2) camlocks. Milcor or
approved equal.
B. Rating
1. Access doors for shafts shall be 3 hour fire rated.
2. Access doors for dropped ceilings do not require rating.
3. Access doors in corridor wall shall be 1-1/2 hour rated.
2.2 FIRE WALL SEALANT:
A. Refer to Section 078413 – Penetration Firestop
B. Provide product data submittal.
2.3 HANGERS, RISER CLAMPS, ATTACHMENTS AND RODS:
A. Hangers
1. Regular: Adjustable clevis type, black steel construction, MSS
Type 1.
2. With Insulation Shield: Adjustable clevis type, black steel
construction, galvanized steel saddle welded to lower strap, MSS
Type 40, of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
B. Riser clamps
1. Riser clamps shall be of steel construction, two-piece type, MSS
Type 42.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 5 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Attachments
1. C-Clamps: Clamps shall be of steel construction with locking nut,
MSS Type 23.
2. Beam Clamps: Beam clamp shall be of malleable iron
construction, MSS Type 21.
D. Hanger Rod
1. Hanger rod shall be steel, full threaded type.
2. Rods:
Pipe Sizes Rod Diameter
Up to 2” 3/8”
2-½ to 3” ½”
4” and 5” 5/8”
E. Floor Supports
1. Floor support hanger devices shall not be used.
F. Wall Hangers
1. Angle iron or unistrut type wall brackets shall not be used.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS:
A. Equipment Labels:
1. Small: Labels shall be adhesive backed plastic tape with
embossed letters in contrasting color. Tape shall be 3/8” wide.
2. Large: Labels shall be adhesive backed plastic tape with
embossed letters in contrasting color. Tape shall be ¾” wide.
3. Make: Seton Name Plate Company.
2.5 SLEEVES:
A. Sheet Metal Sleeves: 10 gauge, galvanized sheet metal, round tube
closed with welded longitudinal joint.
. B. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53,
Grade A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 6 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
3.1 LAYING OUT WORK:
A. The Plans are in part diagrammatic. Contractor shall verify rough-in
dimensions with fixture Shop Drawings and with the Architectural Plans.
Conform to dimensions shown on the Plans in preference to scaling from
the mechanical drawings. Provide all fittings and appurtenances required
for proper system operation.
B. Contractor shall allow for thickness of finishes when roughing in his work.
He shall not rough without obtaining accepted Shop Drawings for the
actual equipment to be installed.
C. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings, changes in elevation, etc. which may be required. Make all such
changes in piping, ductwork, conduit system, location of equipment, etc.,
to accommodate work to obstacles encountered, at no increase in
compensation. If requested, submit at least five (5) copies of drawings
detailing all major deviations or changes. All changes must be approved
before installing.
D. Plans show general arrangement of piping and connections. Install work
substantially as indicated. Verify exact locations and elevations on job.
Before installing work, consult other Plans, details and Contractors to
determine headroom and work interferences. Examine Architectural
Plans for exact location of equipment, fixtures and outlets. Where not
definitely located, obtain information from Architect.
E. Thoroughly coordinate work with that of other Contractors. Raise piping
and drip where necessary. Vent all air pockets in water piping, even
though not so indicated. Determine exact route and/or location of each
pipe before fabrication and installation. Furnish in writing to Architect, any
information necessary to permit work of other trades to be installed
properly and without delay. Maintain maximum head room. If plumbing
work cannot be installed at least 7’-0” above the floor (in mechanical
spaces or basement and higher in finished spaces dependent on ceiling
height), consult with the Engineers and obtain approval before
proceeding. If directed by Architect or Engineers, prepare composite
drawings and sections (scale not less than ¼” = 1’), clearly showing
installation of work in relation to work of other trades.
F. Should Architect's details, field conditions, change in equipment or Shop
Drawing information necessitate an important rearrangement, report
same to Engineers and obtain approval before proceeding.
G. Install piping, etc. to avoid interferences with removal of coils, filters, belt
guards or any operating part of all systems, or operation of overhead or
swinging doors. Maintain easy and safe access to valves, controllers,
motor starters, and other equipment requiring frequent operation.
Maintain opening of access doors, switch boxes, motor starters, panel
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 7 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
boards, etc. Maintain a clear walking space.
H. No compensation awarded for extra work because above precautions
have not been followed. In event of conflicts, Engineer's decision is final.
Contractor fully responsible for unauthorized changes.
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING:
A. Paint all hangers and exposed or unpainted or ungalvanized iron work in
the Plumbing Systems with two brush coats of black rust preventative
paint. Touch up any damaged surfaces of factory painted equipment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
A. It is required of each equipment manufacturer, through the Contractor, to
carefully check Plans and Specifications as same affect their particular
equipment. Report to Engineers, any discrepancies or contradictions as
applied to their particular equipment which prevents proper functioning,
servicing, etc. before or at the time when Shop Drawings are submitted.
Furnish manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each piece of
equipment. Thoroughly instruct contractors' personnel on job, exactly
how their equipment shall be installed, connected, lubricated, started up,
operated, etc., so that all factory instructions are rigidly followed.
B. Install, test, start and operate all equipment only as instructed by
manufacturer and in presence of manufacturer's representative, as
directed. Follow instructions of manufacturer as noted above. Provide
mock-up installation of certain typical equipment, if required, such as
fixtures, chair carriers, countersinks, etc. as directed, and obtain
Architect's and Engineer's approval before proceeding with actual
installation of same.
C. Contractor shall provide as recommended by manufacturer all necessary
incidental valves, fittings, piping, wiring, etc., not supplied by
manufacturer or other Contractors, for proper apparatus operation
Contractor shall provide accurate information to other Contractors for
required services to equipment, such as water supply and waste
connections, masonry openings, wiring requirements, etc. Such
information shall be complete and correct for particular job.
D. If required by Engineers, contractor shall submit satisfactory evidence
that equipment, systems, etc. have been installed strictly in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations, have been properly aligned, are
properly adjusted, have been properly tested, lubricated, balanced, etc.
E. As soon as installed, lubricate and leave in good working order, all
motors, bearings, etc., in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Lubrication Chart - Provide 8-1/2” x 11” lubrication chart, typed in capital
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 8 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
letters, mounted in wood frame under clear plastic. Hang were directed.
Heating Contractor shall provide chart listing all motors. Other
Contractors supply information on motors furnished by them.
G. List following information:
1. Name and location of equipment.
2. Type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer.
3. Lubrication period recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING:
A. Notify Engineers when installation(s) is/are ready for testing, as specified
with ample time in advance. Provide all metered and unmetered
services, tools, equipment and manpower necessary to perform tests.
B. Perform all equipment testing as specified as recommended by
manufacturer and directed by Engineers. Demonstrate that all operating
and safety devices are in proper working order.
C. Perform necessary operating and pressure testing for all piping and
equipment which shall be: buried underground, before backfilling;
installed in or under slabs, before pouring; buried in building walls, before
being buried and installed above furred ceilings before ceiling installation.
3.5 ACCESS DOORS:
A. Provide where indicated and where required for access to all equipment.
3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. All components shall be selected for a minimum safety factor of 5.
B. All rigid hanger assemblies shall provide for vertical movement after
installation by means of threaded adjustment.
C. Hanger rods shall be subjected to tensile loads only. Where axial or
lateral movement is anticipated, suitable linkages shall be provided.
D. Support units from the building structural system, NOT from metal roof
decks.
E. All units, including pipe attachments, structural attachments, hanger rods,
bracing, all necessary accessories and their installation shall be in
accordance with NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems, latest issue.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS (General Installation Requirements):
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 00 – PAGE 9 OF 9
MARCH 29, 2013
require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags
in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of
covering and painting.
B. Equipment:
1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic
equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not
otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the
following general categories of equipment and operational
devices.
a. Pumps, fans, and similar motor-driven units.
2. Lettering Size: Minimum ¼” high lettering for name of unit where
viewing distance is less than 2’- 0”, ½” high for distances up to 6’-
0”, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances.
Provide secondary lettering ½ to ¾ of size of principal lettering.
3. Test of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide
lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of
operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency
precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
END OF SECTION 23 01 00
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 1 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 230101 -- HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for
Division 23, Heating and Ventilation work.
1.2 DIVISION 23 - DESCRIPTION:
The technical specifications of this Contract are arranged for the convenience of
the Owner and Contractor into Divisions of work. The work of Division 23,
HVAC, is further described in Specification Sections of the 23 01 00 Series and
on contract drawings of the "M series.
The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the prime Contractor
from providing all of the work shown on the complete set of drawings or specified
in the complete set of Specifications, whether or not the individual subcontractors
correctly identify their respective responsibilities.
1.3 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK:
To the extent that the work of this Division or Contract includes the work of other
trades, the Contractor for this Division shall adhere to the requirements of other
specification sections. All General Construction work shall be performed in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate Division 02 through Division 09
Sections. All electrical work shall be performed in accordance with appropriate
Division 26 Sections.
1.4 WORK INCLUDED:
The work of this Division shall include providing all materials, labor, services,
permits and related work to furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning,
documented HVAC System including all work shown, specified or required for
proper system operation including but not limited to the following:
A. Provide Basic Materials and Methods.
B. Provide Mechanical Coordination Drawings.
C. Provide Exhaust Fans where shown.
D. Provide Ductwork where shown.
E. Provide Fire Dampers and Fire/Smoke Dampers where shown.
F. Provide demolition and removal of existing equipment, ductwork and
piping where shown, removal of all debris from site and proper disposal of
same.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 2 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
G, Provide revision of ductwork piping and provide new ductwork and piping
as shown on mechanical drawings. Provide liner and flexible ductwork as
shown.
H. Provide and install duct access panels in duct as shown.
I. Provide and install new diffusers, registers and grilles.
J. Provide insulation.
K. Provide air balance at completion of project, provide final report.
L. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance.
M. Provide openings in existing and new construction as required for the
work of this division.
N. Provide fan coil units where shown.
O. Provide split-system air conditioning units where shown.
P. Provide piping where shown.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Ductwork, supply, return and flexible
2. Registers, diffusers and grilles (air devices)
3. Volume, Fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers
4. Motorized dampers
5. Access Panels
6. Insulation
7. Ductwork Coordination drawings,
8. Mechanical Coordination drawings
9. Exhaust Fans.
10. Controls, as required
11. Piping
12. Fan coil units
13. Split-system air conditioning units
14. Pre-construction & final construction testing and balancing report.
B. Provide Owner's Operation Instruction
C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals - four (4) copies
D. Provide Warranty Documents
1.6 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A. Asbestos removal is not included in the work of this contract. See
Section 013529.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 3 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. Provide products as specified in Division 23.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Conform to Division 23 Specifications for installation and execution of
work.
END OF SECTION 230101
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 01 01 – PAGE 4 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 1 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work specified in
this Section.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. This section includes all labor and materials necessary to test, adjust, and
balance in accordance with design criteria the equipment and
components of systems included in Division 23 as follows:
1. Air Distribution
2. Equipment Performance
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
Provide the Following:
A. Preconstruction testing & balancing report.
B. Final testing & balancing report.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS:
B. Work included in this section must be performed by an AABC or NEBB
certified independent testing and balancing contractor or an Owner
approved TAB contractor who shall test, adjust and balance the air and
water systems for this project.
C. Owner approved acceptable testing and balancing agencies (no others):
1. Air Systems Balancing and Testing Service, Inc., West Henrietta,
NY 585-334-7710.
2. Balance Technologies, LaFayette, NY, 315-677-7769.
3. AD&M Testing and Balancing, 3 E. Bihrwood Dr., West Seneca,
NY 14224, 716-677-0980)
4. Mechanical Testing, Inc., Schenectady, NY 518-374-9440.
1.5 TEST REPORT:
A. The balancing agency shall prepare a written report which shall include
diagrams and descriptions of procedures together with all recorded test
data. Report shall be submitted in bound volumes for a permanent
record. Submit four copies of report. A set of contract drawings shall
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 2 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
also be submitted with the report. Drawings shall have each air device,
flow fitting, fan, and traverse location identified in red ink by a number
which shall match identification numbers utilized in the balancing report.
B. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary report within 15 working days after
completion of tests of individual systems. Submit four (4) copies of final
report within 15 working days after completion of all final adjustments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST INSTRUMENTS:
A. Use instruments of equal or better quality than those described in the
technical portions of Associated Air Balance Council National Standards
for Field Measurements and Instrumentation Vol. 2, No. 12173 “Total
System Balance”.
B. Instruments used for balancing air and water systems must have been
calibrated within a period of 6 months prior to balancing. Submit with
balancing report, model number and calibration date of all instruments
utilized.
C. List in the report types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all
instruments used in the final air and water balance tests.
D. Instruments shall include, as a minimum, the following items of
equipment:
1. Pressure gauges and fittings.
2. Dry bulb and wet bulb thermometers.
3. Contact pyrometer.
4. Portable flow meter and, if required, orifice plates.
5. Pitot tube and manometers.
6. Alnor Velometer with attachments.
7. Amprobe.
8. Tachometer.
9. Special wrenches and tools.
10. Anemometer.
E. Provide suitable ladders and safety equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project
requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may
preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 3 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage
cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these
balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of
design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output,
and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system
and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1) Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements,
including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
2) Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the
conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system
effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct
Design." Compare results with the design data and installed
conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-
control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections
have been performed.
G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment
Sections.
H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning
controls is ready for operation.
I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that
they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent
screens with indicated perforations.
K. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended
function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
L. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction
piping.
M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 4 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB
procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in
conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the
following:
1) Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2) Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3) Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4) Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5) Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6) Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are
operational.
7) Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments
are required and access to balancing devices is provided.
8) Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system
operations can be met.
3.3 TEST PROCEDURE:
A. System may be tested in increments when approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
B. When testing and balancing involve the building temperature control
systems, cooperate with the University to achieve the desired results.
C. At the time of the final inspection, recheck in the presence and at the
request of the Architect/Engineer not to exceed 10 percent of the
previously recorded readings from the certified report selected at the
discretion of the Architect/Engineer.
D. Permanently mark the settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment
devices so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time.
E. Perform all tests in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council
(AABC) or NEBB standard procedures. Any deviations from same must
be submitted and approved.
F. Should the basic system or any of its component fail to meet
requirements, and thereby make the testing and balancing work invalid,
notify the Architect/Engineer and stop the tests until such time that the
failure is corrected.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 5 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
3.4 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING
SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to
remain and be reused.
1) Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure
of each fan.
2) Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor
nameplate information.
3) Measure and record the water flow, impeller size, pump head, hp,
break hp and location on manufacturer’s pump curve for each pump.
4) Check the refrigerant charge.
5) Check the condition of filters.
6) Check the condition of coils.
7) Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
8) Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
9) Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of
the measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect
existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing
equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:
1) New filters are installed.
2) Coils are clean and fins combed.
3) Drain pans are clean.
4) Fans are clean.
5) Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6) Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that
existing systems are affected by the renovation work.
1) Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured
fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of
filters and coils.
2) Compare the additional water flow required for the renovated work to
the measured pump flows, and determine the new pump flow,
amperage, voltage, rpm, and pump head.
3) Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter
and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable
limits defined by equipment manufacturer.
4) Verify that the additional water flow for the renovated work results in
pump operation that is within the acceptable limits defined by
equipment manufacturer.
5) If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow
rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to
achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or
less, equipment adjustments are not required.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 6 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
6) Balance each air outlet.
3.5 GENERAL:
A. Review plans and specifications of systems to be tested and balanced to
confirm that the arrangement, instrumentation and balancing devices will
permit the system to be balanced and tested in the manner described in
this section. Report to the Architect/Engineer in writing, prior to start of
any system construction, any devices which need to be added or any
phases of the design which need to be modified to permit the fulfillment of
this work. Assume responsibility for all devices required for proper
balancing beyond those defined by the contract documents, and not
reported by the contractor prior to physical start of construction.
B. Conduct balancing and testing in accordance with technical portions of
the Associated Air Balancing Council “National Standards for Field
Measurements and Instrumentation” Vol. 2, No. 12173 “Total System
Balance” latest edition, or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing and
Balancing latest edition.
C. Provide all labor, testing equipment, and materials required to conduct
tests and balance systems (pre and post construction). Include all costs
in base bid and form of proposal.
D. The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor shall be responsible for
providing all duct test holes as may be required for testing and balancing
of systems.
E. Systems shall be operated at least 4 hours after stabilized operating
conditions have been established before conducting capacity tests. All
filters and strainers shall be in place. Start up strainers shall be removed.
Capacity and performance tests of equipment and systems shall be
performed only after balancing is complete.
F. Submit for approval, a test procedure plan for variable air volume systems
and other variable flow systems. Indicate diversity conditions and test
modes for systems operating with diversities.
G. Permanently mark the balanced position of all balancing valves and
dampers.
3.6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT:
A. Prior to the start of balancing, perform a system functional test.
B. Lubricate and check all dampers.
C. Verify that all fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers are open and links
are in place.
D. Check that backdraft and automatic dampers operate correctly.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 7 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Check that all access doors are closed.
F. Check that all valves are open.
G. Check for proper belt tension and alignment on fan drivers.
H. Check for proper fan rotation.
I. Check that all motors and fan bearings have been lubricated.
J. Confirm that motors, damper motors and valves are wired and that proper
overload heaters and fuses are installed.
K. Label in 1" black block letters on fan and pump housings fan
name/numbers or pump name/numbers. Designation shall correspond to
those on the drawings.
L. Mark proper rotation on a permanent portion of the fan.
3.7 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS:
A. All air distribution systems including supply, return, outdoor, relief and
exhaust ductwork shall be tested and balanced.
B. Where an existing system cannot be properly balanced or equipment
tested due to adverse conditions such as inability to properly adjust fan
speeds, improperly sized motors, excessively noisy equipment,
malfunctioning controls, dirty filters, inaccessibility, and similar items,
furnish to the Architect/Engineer in writing, within seven (7) days of
discovery, a list of the conditions which preclude proper execution of the
work.
C. Make openings in ducts required for pitot tube insertion and seal those
openings with snap-in plugs or specially approved seals for grease ducts
and lab ducts. Neatly remove duct insulation as required for test.
D. Specific testing and balancing procedures shall include:
1. Test and adjust speed of all air apparatus.
2. Test and record motor make, horsepower, rpm, volts, phase, hertz
and amperage.
3. Make Pitot tube traverse of main ducts and obtain design air
quantity at fans.
4. Test and record system static pressures, suction, and discharge
as well as pressure drops across each system element; i.e., fans,
filters, coils, louvers, air blenders, dampers, etc.
5. Test and adjust systems for design supply, outside, relief,
exhaust, and return air quantities. Test CFM at fans and adjust all
fan systems to +10% to -5% of design flow.
6. Adjust all main and branch ducts for supply, return and exhaust
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 8 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
air. Set and “mark” all volume dampers. Identify, test, and adjust
each air device (grille, register, diffuser, etc.) to within 10% of
design quantities.
7. Test, adjust and verify operation of unit heaters, cabinet heaters,
exhaust fans, etc., in accordance with AABC or NEBB Standard
procedures. Record results.
8. For each static pressure controller, establish and record setpoint;
record controller offset.
9. For each air flow measuring device, verify and record flow; record
measuring device offset.
10. Verify that all smoke and fire dampers are open during normal
operating mode and operate properly at shutdown.
11. Set automatic operated dampers to operate as required to achieve
balance conditions.
12. Lubricate all dampers and linkages.
13. Record all fan, motor, drive, sheave and belt nameplate
information.
E. Provide duct leakage tests. Submit test results to Architect/Engineer
immediately (within 10 days) upon completion of each test and include
copies of all results with balancing report test conditions and results for
each section of duct tested. Include diagrams if required to define tested
sections.
3.8 REPORTING:
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract
Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the
adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend
changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper
performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and
additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for
performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe
completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled
procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems
being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system
and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.9 REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report
into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1) Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed
and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
2) Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 9 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include
the following:
1) Pump curves.
2) Fan curves.
3) Manufacturers' test data.
4) Location, size and airflow of each grille, register or diffuser.
5) Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
6) Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include
Shop Drawings and product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the
following data:
1) Title page.
2) Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3) Project name.
4) Project location.
5) Architect's name and address.
6) Engineer's name and address.
7) Contractor's name and address.
8) Report date.
9) Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10) Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each
section of the report. Number each page in the report.
11) Summary of contents including the following:
a) Indicated versus final performance.
b) Notable characteristics of systems.
c) Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the
Contract Documents.
12) Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13) Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size,
and fittings.
14) Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary
from indicated values.
D. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the
following:
1) Fan Data:
a) System identification.
b) Location.
c) Make and type.
d) Model number and size.
e) Manufacturer's serial number.
f) Arrangement and class.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 10 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
g) Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h) Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments
in inches (mm).
2) Motor Data:
a) Motor make, and frame type and size.
b) Horsepower and rpm.
c) Volts, phase, and hertz.
d) Full-load amperage and service factor.
e) Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f) Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments
in inches (mm).
g) Number, make, and size of belts.
3) Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a) Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b) Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c) Fan rpm.
d) Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e) Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
E. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a
diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the
following:
1) Report Data:
a) System and air-handling-unit number.
b) Location and zone.
c) Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d) Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e) Duct size in inches (mm).
f) Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
g) Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
h) Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).
i) Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s).
j) Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k) Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).
F. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head
on pump curves and include the following:
1) Unit Data:
a) Unit identification.
b) Location.
c) Service.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 05 93 – PAGE 11 OF 11
MARCH 29, 2013
d) Make and size.
e) Model number and serial number.
f) Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
g) Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h) Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i) Pump rpm.
j) Impeller diameter in inches (mm).
k) Motor make and frame size.
l) Motor horsepower and rpm.
m) Voltage at each connection.
n) Amperage for each phase.
o) Full-load amperage and service factor.
p) Seal type.
2) Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a) Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
b) Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
c) Actual impeller size in inches (mm).
d) Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).
e) Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f) Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g) Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h) Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i) Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
j) Voltage at each connection.
k) Amperage for each phase.
G. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1) Report Data:
a) Instrument type and make.
b) Serial number.
c) Application.
d) Dates of use.
e) Dates of calibration.
3.10 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and
randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating
according to the final test and balance readings documented in the
final report.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 1 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 230713 -- DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated. Include thermal
conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory-
and field-applied if any).
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed
an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION THICKNESS AND TYPES
A. All supply and return ductwork in non-conditioned spaces shall be insulated
as follows:
1. Exposed Ductwork: 1.5-inches rigid fiberglass board, 3.0 pounds per
cubic foot density, to a minimum R-value of 5, complete with a factory
applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier, suitably anchored and
sealed at all points.
2. Concealed Ductwork: 1.5-inches fiberglass blanket, 0.75 pounds per
cubic foot density, to a minimum R-value of 5, complete with a factory
applied vapor barrier, suitably anchored and sealed at all points
B. The use of flexible elastomeric insulation on ductwork is permitted as an
acceptable alternative to fiberglass. Insulation shall be adhered to 100% of
the duct surface area.
C. Preferred Manuafacturers
1. Johns Manville
2. Knauf
3. Owens Corning
4. Armacell, LLC
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 2 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
2. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
2. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
2. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient
services.
1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm
(0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to
plus 82 deg C).
3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by
weight.
4. Color: White.
2.4 TAPES
A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket
with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 3 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.5 SECUREMENTS
A. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated
steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-
mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with
integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.
2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers:
Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding
insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-
locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch
(0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed,
0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and
substrates.
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-
inch- (0.41-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as
required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) in diameter.
a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring
steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-)
wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight,
and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
C. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 4 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams
staggered.
E. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
F. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams
and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
G. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
H. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-
barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to
point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to
structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended
coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
J. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same
material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward
clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean
and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward
clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material
manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
K. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75
percent of its nominal thickness.
L. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint
separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
M. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over
damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond
damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 5 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
3.2 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive
and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage
rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of
fittings and transitions.
3. Install cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of
horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller,
place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75
mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place
pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm)
maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers
with tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install
a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal
seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from
one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
(25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied
jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and
protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to
maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50
deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall
consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over
insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two
times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal
seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a
maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.
6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full
insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-
oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond
insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 6 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger,
and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive
and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage
rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of
fittings and transitions.
3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-
head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal
ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place
pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm)
maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space
pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm)
maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal
seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from
one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
(25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied
jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and
protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to
maintain vapor-barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50
deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall
consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over
insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two
times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full
insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as
closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install
insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered
gores cut to fit the elbow.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP DUCT INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 13 –PAGE 7 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond
insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material
used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and
flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
END OF SECTION 230713
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 1 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 230719 -- HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated. Include thermal
conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and
field applied if any).
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed
an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the
Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as
determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer
with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum
use temperature.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor
Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation
Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 2 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable
chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as
acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with
annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.
2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 1.
6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with
ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
G. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber
materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
H. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded
with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A,
with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 3 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 196.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Thermokote V.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply
with ASTM C 449.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive
containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus
100 to plus 200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C).
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 81-84.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 4 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 85-75.
d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-127.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C,
Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-82.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; 85-50.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 5 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient
services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.
b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm
(0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to
plus 82 deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by
weight.
5. Color: White.
2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be
compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of
50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.
b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 30-36.
c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.
3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors
to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.
4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82
deg C).
5. Color: White.
2.6 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 6 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products, Subject to compliance with
requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 30-45.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.
Fuller Company; 95-44.
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to
plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: Aluminum.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H.
B. Fuller Company; CP-76.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to
plus 121 deg C).
5. Color: White.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 7 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-
Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various
applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the
following:
1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for
shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied
jacket schedules.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Johns Manville; Zeston.
b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.
d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3. Color: White.
4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise,
field fabricate.
a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees,
valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps,
mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, laminated vapor
barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located
aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a
crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 8 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.
2.9 TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with
acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket
with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm).
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
5. Elongation: 2 percent.
6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.10 SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 9 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015
inch (0.38 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or
5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide
with wing seal.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-)
wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before
insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature
between 32 and 300 deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating.
Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and
application methods for operating temperature range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to
be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight,
and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including
fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation
system schedules.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 10 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams
staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings,
and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams
and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-
barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to
point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to
structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation.
Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture
by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended
coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same
material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward
clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm)
o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry
surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching
staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 11 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material
manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75
percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint
separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over
damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond
damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation
above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring
indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications
tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
(50 mm) below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation
inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring
indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications
tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall
flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not
Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 12 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except
where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation
material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings
made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each
piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with
adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform
with adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut
sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and
hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box
studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate
strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable
reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design
that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and
coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services
and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic
with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-
shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for
flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows,
tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC
end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC
tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"union." Match size and color of pipe labels.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 13 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure
temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and
transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by
tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with
finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall
conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation
of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket
as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation,
extend insulation from flanges or union at least two times the insulation
thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union.
Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands.
Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for
flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of
valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each
consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this
wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend
insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation
with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement
applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat
to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish
exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints,
and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do
not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-
barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of
cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 14 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing
sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire
or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of
sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow
passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow
passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe
insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe
and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to
packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation
that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 15 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
3.8 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands
and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints,
and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do
not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-
barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber
blanket insulation.
4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing
sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install
mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or
insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at
seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of
lagging adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed
insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 16 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-
inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and
exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at
longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead
under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at
longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to
shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by
insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches
(300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
3.10 FINISHES
A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with
jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric
mildew proof.
a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to
allow visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses
are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one
material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is
Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on
the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel
injury.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 17 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm)
thick.
B. Chilled Water, 40 Deg F (5 Deg C) and below:
1. NPS 3 (DN 80) and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
2. NPS 4 (DN 100) to NPS 12 (DN 300): Insulation shall be one of the
following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I, 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
C. Chilled Water above 40 Deg F (5 Deg C):
1. NPS 12 (DN 300) and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
D. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm)
thick.
E. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Chilled Water:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 3 inches (75 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches (75 mm)
thick.
B. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Piping:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
c. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm)
thick.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HVAC PIPING INSULATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 07 19 – PAGE 18 OF 18
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Refrigerant Suction and Liquid Flexible Tubing:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
3.14 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied
jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is
Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied
jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is
Contractor's option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick.
2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
D. Piping, Exposed:
1. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick.
2. Painted Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.032 inch
(0.81 mm) thick.
END OF SECTION 230719
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 1 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 232113 -- HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting
Industry.
B. DWV: Drain, Waste and Vent
C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of the following:
1. Copper Pipe
2. Steel Pipe
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the
pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to
join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.
B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
1. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper tube or
ASTM B 584, bronze casting.
2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated;
gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting
grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F (110
deg C) for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
C. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 2 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Housing: Copper.
2. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM.
3. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools.
4. Minimum 200-psig (1379-kPa) working-pressure rating at 250 deg F (121
deg C).
D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and
wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match
adjoining pipe.
C. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings:
ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material
group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
D. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall
thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions
of piping system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm)
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable
flux according to ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with
bronze or steel.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding
materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe
being welded.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 3 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be
handled and working temperatures and pressures.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with
separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections
compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.
b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c. Pressure Rating: Minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C), 150 psig (1035
kPa).
d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;
threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Nipples:
1. Description:
a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66
b. Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545.
c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
2.5 VALVES
A. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
1. Basis-of-Design Product:
a. Flow Design Inc.
b. Griswold Controls.
2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning,
and removable.
4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 4 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow
rate.
6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over
system pressure fluctuations.
8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).
9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F (93 deg C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the
following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
soldered brazed or pressure-seal joints.
B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, shall be
the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-
steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive or flanged joints.
C. Glycol cooling-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall
be the following:
1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
soldered brazed or pressure-seal joints.
D. Glycol cooling-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger,
shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-
steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
E. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-
copper fittings, and soldered joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if
such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump
sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and
service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 5 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than
system operating pressure.
K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying
insulation and servicing of valves.
L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short
NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system
mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in
main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-
feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at
final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
Q. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, at final connections of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20
feet (6 m) long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal
piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet
(6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in
direct contact with copper pipe.
B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 6 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
HANGERS MAXIMUM SPAN MINIMUM ROD SIZE
NPS 2-1/2 11 feet 3/8 inch
NPS 3 12 feet 3/8 inch
C. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum
spacing and minimum rod sizes:
HANGERS MAXIMUM SPAN MINIMUM ROD SIZE
NPS ¾ 5 feet ¼ inch
NPS 1 6 feet ¼ inch
NPS 1-1/2 8 feet 3/8 inch
NPS 2 8 feet 3/8 inch
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23
Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel
pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise
indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's
"Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with
ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook,"
"Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal
complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads
unless dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or
open welds.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 13 – PAGE 7 OF 7
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using
qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality
Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness
for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and
procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination
during test.
2. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or
replace strainer screens.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its
closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage
to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than
test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other
source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of
damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and
compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5
times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in
system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical
runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or
1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping."
4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by
tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test
until there are no leaks.
5. Prepare written report of testing.
END OF SECTION 232113
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 1 OF 4
NOVEMBER 2, 2012MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves
and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final
impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated.
Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.
4. Patterson Pump Co.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller,
close-coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for
installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and
outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange
connections.
2. Impeller: 30% glass filled noryl.
3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a
ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring.
5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 2 OF 4
NOVEMBER 2, 2012MARCH 29, 2013
2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof.
2.2 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED PUMPS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings > or comparable product by one of the
following:
1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.
2. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.
3. Patterson Pump Co.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, with a proportional pressure
control, which automatically adjusts the pump performance continuously and
automatically to the requirements of the system.
C. Pump Construction:
1. Body: Cast Iron
2. O-ring: EPRM
3. Impeller: Nylon/PPO
4. Pump Bearings: Carbon/alumina ceramic.
D. Motor: Shaft-less spherical electronically commutated, permanent magnet
motor (ECM/PMM).
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section
"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps
are to be installed.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 3 OF 4
NOVEMBER 2, 2012MARCH 29, 2013
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing
motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported
by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
C. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger
rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of in-line
pumps.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment
service.
B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of
pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base
frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.
C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly.
Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks
and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten
foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and
maintenance.
B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping
connected to pumps.
C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of
pump nozzles.
D. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-
gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP HYDRONIC PUMPS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 21 23 – PAGE 4 OF 4
NOVEMBER 2, 2012MARCH 29, 2013
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling
hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or
drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and
corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Start motor.
6. Open discharge valve slowly.
END OF SECTION 232123
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 1 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 232300 --REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of valve and refrigerant piping
specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test
data, for the following:
1. Copper tube.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications."
B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer
Components."
1.3 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to
ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:
1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig (2068 kPa).
2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig (3689 kPa).
3. Liquid Lines: 535 psig (3689 kPa).
2.2 REFRIGERANTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.
2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 2 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
E. Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-
reinforced protective jacket.
2. End Connections: Socket ends.
3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm)
misalignment in minimum 7-inch- (180-mm-) long assembly.
4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig (3450 kPa).
5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A
A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller Copper, Type ACR,
annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.
B. Liquid Lines Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and
wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing,
and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except
in equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and
service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs
are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 3 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.
G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than
system operating pressure.
J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of
joints, elbows, and fittings.
K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service
and inspection. Install access doors or panels if valves or equipment
requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.
M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where
exposed to mechanical injury.
N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to
compressor.
2. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
3. Liquid lines may be installed level.
O. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls
and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation.
P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than
20 feet (6 m) long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet
(6 m) or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet
(6 m) or longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod
size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP REFRIGERANT PIPING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 23 00 – PAGE 4 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod
size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod
size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
C. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,
condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they
are not rated above the test pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at
not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article.
a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.
b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage
throughout duration of test.
c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a
small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
3.5 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system per manufacturer’s written instructions
END OF SECTION 23 23 00
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 1 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 233113 -- METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of the following products:
1. Liners and adhesives.
2. Sealants and gaskets.
B. Provide Shop Drawings as Follows:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-
pressure classes.
4. Elevation of top of ducts.
5. Fittings.
6. Seam and joint construction.
7. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
8. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
9. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and
access doors and panels.
10. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building
attachment and vibration isolation.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
[AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and
supports.] [AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for
aluminum supports.] [AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal W elding Code," for
duct joint and seam welding.]
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and
supports.
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum
supports.
3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 2 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -
"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-
Up."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and
Insulation."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the
effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible".
B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-
pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1,
"Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other
provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class,
applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct
Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and
Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
E. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class,
applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 3 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND[ AND FLAT-OVAL] DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and
Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Lindab Inc.
b. McGill AirFlow LLC.
c. SEMCO Incorporated.
d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension)
and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor
dimension).
C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1,
"Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class,
applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible."
E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90
Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-
pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-
support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials,
material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 4 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths
36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths
longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.5 DUCT LINER
A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or
NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Knauf Insulation.
d. Owens Corning.
e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K)
at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 W/m x K) at
75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner
that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent
and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for
efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and
with ASTM C 916.
a. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80
g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for
the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct
Liner Installation."
1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90
percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining
indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 5 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not
receive metal nosing.
3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to
ensure butted-edge overlapping.
5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at
corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make
longitudinal joints necessary.
6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners
and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3
inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18
inches (450 mm) longitudinally.
2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics
for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723;
certified by an NRTL.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on.
2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4. Water resistant.
5. Mold and mildew resistant.
6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and
negative.
8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and
bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
C. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with
polyisobutylene plasticizer.
D. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch
wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-
Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-
fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods
and nuts.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 6 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct
Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round
Duct."
C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A 603.
D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with
brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an
automatic-locking and clamping device.
E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal
screws; compatible with duct materials.
F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and
plates.
2.8 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
2. Frames:
a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm)
minimum thickness.
b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in
ducts.
3. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade.
b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
4. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
5. Bearings:
a. Molded synthetic.
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less
shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both
ends of operating shaft.
B. Damper Hardware:
1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- (2.4-
mm-) thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch (19-mm) hexagon locking nut.
2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 7 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.9 TURNING VANES
A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized
sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane
runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions
with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners,"
and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
C. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide
and double wall for larger dimensions.
2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible";
Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors
- Round Duct."
1. Door:
a. Double wall, rectangular.
b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated
for duct pressure class.
c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge
and cam latches.
d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
3. Number of Hinges and Locks:
a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and
two sash locks.
b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two
sash locks.
c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges
and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four
hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 8 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches
(89 mm) wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch-
(0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch
(63 N/mm) in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93
deg C).
E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m).
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch
(77 N/mm) in the filling.
3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121
deg C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and
arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-
handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct
systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop
Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round [ and flat-oval] ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and
shape and for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and
parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 9 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other
structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation
thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical
equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls
and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or
duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct.
Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls,
install fire dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other
foreign materials.[ Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New
Construction Guidelines."]
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or
damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed
bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld
splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the
welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove
discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and
fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply
with these requirements.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for leakage classes in table below:
DUCT TYPE LEAKAGE CLASS, CFM/100 ft at 1” wg
Metal (flexible excluded)
Round and Flat Oval [3]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 10 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
Rectangular [6]
Flexible [6]
B. Note: Leakage classes for specific applications may be specified elsewhere
in this specification.
MINIMUM DUCT SEAL LEVELA
DUCT TYPE
Duct Location Supply
<2 in. w.c.b >2 in. w.c.b. Exhaust Return
Outdoor A A C A
Unconditioned
Spaces
B A C B
Conditioned
Spacesc
C B B C
a See description of seal levels below.
b Duct design static pressure classification.
c Includes indirectly conditioned spaces such as return air plenums.
C. Longitudinal seams are joints oriented in the direction of airflow. Transverse
joints are connections of two duct sections oriented perpendicular to airflow.
Duct wall penetrations are openings made by any screw fastener, pipe, rod,
or wire. Spiral lock seams in a round or flat oval duct need not be sealed. All
other connections are considered transverse joints, including but not limited
to spin-ins, taps, and other branch connections, access door frames and
jambs, duct connections to equipment, etc.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or
structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which
hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 11 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct
Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round
Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24
inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each
branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the
duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each
floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors.
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 PAINTING
A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and
that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a
compatible galvanized-steel primer.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Leakage Tests:
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a
test report for each test.
2. Test the following systems:
a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher:
Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of
total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
b. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher:
Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of
total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 12 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
c. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher:
Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 50 percent of
total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.
3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to
accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of
system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not
indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not
pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.
6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8 DUCT CLEANING
A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-
pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels
for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by
duct liner manufacturer.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and
inspection.
3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and
deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except
ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts,
baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.
3. Coils and related components.
4. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling
plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.
5. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
6. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
3.9 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 13 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Supply Duct Pressure Class:
1. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
B. Return Duct Pressure Class:
1. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
C. Exhaust Duct Pressure Class:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa).
D. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and
two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and
two vanes.
3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-
degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP METAL DUCTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 31 13 – PAGE 14 OF 14
MARCH 29, 2013
1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio
and three segments for 90-degree elbow.
2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter
ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.
3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio
and five segments for 90-degree elbow.
4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter:
Stamped or pleated.
c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing
seam.
E. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and
Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in
existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap.
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 23 31 13
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 1 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 233316 -- FIRE DAMPERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
B. The Work of the Section 23 01 00 - Mechanical Basic Materials and
Methods applies to the Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented fire
damper and combination fire and smoke damper system including all
work shown, specified, or required for proper system operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide product data for each fire damper, combination fire and smoke
damper, relief grill, wall frame and media filter assembly.
B. Provide wiring diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE DAMPER AND SLEEVE ASSEMBLY:
A. 1- ½ hour U.L. classified static fire damper. Frame: 20 gauge galvanized
steel channel. 24 gauge galvanized curtain type blades outside
airstream, except when located behind grille where blades may be inside
airstream.
B. Provide 212 F fusible link.
C. Each fire damper shall include a steel sleeve of length to suit application
and retaining angles furnished by the damper manufacturer.
D. Provide space fusible links.
E. Manufacturer and Model: Ruskin, Air Balance Inc. or equal.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 2 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
2.2 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS:
A. 1-1/2 hour UL classified static combination fire and smoke damper. 16
gauge galvanized steel frame. 16 gauge galvanized multiple V-groove or
airfoil blade type. Class I leakage rating.
B. Heat-Responsive Device: 212° F Electric fuse link and switch package,
factory installed, rated.
C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to
suite wall application.
E. Manufacturer: Ruskin Company, Greenheck Fan Corporation, Air
Balance Inc. or equal.
2.3 FIRE DAMPER /FIRE SMOKE DAMPER ACCESS DOOR:
A. Provide 12” x 12” minimum duct access door at location suitable to reset
curtain and replace fusible link or reset actuator. Duct access doors shall
be hinged one side. They shall be gasketed and shall include a minimum
of two camlock latches.
B. Enlarge access doors as required in large ducts or difficult to reach areas
so that a fusible link can be readily replaced.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS:
A. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation
instructions and with the locations and details shown on the Plans.
3.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS:
A. Locate in the general locations shown on the Plans or adjacent to and
close enough to fire damper or combination fire smoke damper to allow
resetting the fire damper curtain and replacement of the fusible link. Mark
each access door "Fire Damper Access" in black permanent marker.
3.3 PRE-PUNCH LIST REVIEW:
A. The Contractor shall perform a pre-punch list review and shall verify the
following for each fire damper and combination fire and smoke damper:
1. Fire/smoke damper installed at each location shown on the Plans.
2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Sleeve installed and fire/smoke damper anchored to sleeve
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 3 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
properly.
4. Angles anchored to sleeve and free floating in general
construction.
5. U.L. clearances between sleeve and general construction to avoid
binding damper in a fire due to expansion of the metal against a
tight opening.
6. Angles overlap general construction of opening by 1” minimum.
7. Duct access doors are installed and are located properly to allow
resetting damper curtain replacing fusible link.
8. Duct access doors are accessible through the general
construction.
3.4 ENGINEER'S ACCESSIBILITY TEST:
A. The Engineer shall, at his/her option, sever up to 5% of the fusible links on fire
dampers but in no case less than two or more than ten so that the Contractor can
demonstrate the ease with which the duct access doors allow re-setting of fire
dampers and replacement of fusible links.
B. The locations for these tests shall be at the sole discretion of the Engineer and
Owner.
C. The Contractor shall provide spare fusible links and shall demonstrate the
replacement of fusible links and re-setting of dampers.
D. If in the judgment of the Engineer, acting as the Owner's representative, the
access is not adequate to allow proper fire dampers servicing, the Contractor
shall install additional access doors as required to allow proper servicing of the
fire dampers.
3.5 SPARE FUSIBLE LINKS
A. Provide five (5) spare fusible links at each temperature rating. Submit to
Engineer and obtain a receipt.
END OF SECTION 23 33 16
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE DAMPERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 33 16 – PAGE 4 OF 4
MARCH 29, 2013
[ PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ]
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 1 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 233416 -- CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide the following:
1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
fan.
2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions
indicated.
3. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical
accessories.
5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
7. Vibration Isolators
8. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AMCA Compliance:
1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-
Certified Ratings Seal.
2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
2.2 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS (BELT DRIVE)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
Loren Cook Model SQI or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Chicago Blower Corporation.
2. Cincinnati Fan.
3. New York Blower Company (The).
B. Description:
1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor,
drive assembly, and support structure.
2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by
shipping limitations.
3. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch.
C. Disconnect Switches:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 2 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
1. NEMA rated: 1
2. Positive electrical shut-off.
D. Housings:
1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff.
2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for
mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
3. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
4. Spun inlet cone with flange.
5. Outlet flange.
6. Constructed of steel and coated with permatector.
7. Housing and bearing supports shall be constructed of welded steel
members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearing
assembly balancing up to a minimum of 10 horsepower.
E. Housing Supports and Drive Frame:
1. Housing supports are constructed of structural steel with formed flanges.
2. Drive frame is welded steel which supports the shaft and bearings and
reinforcement for the housing.
3. Pivoting motor plate with adjusting screws to make belt tensioning
operations.
4. Prepunched mounting holes for installation.
5. Drive frame is coated with Permatector.
F. Backward-Inclined Wheels:
1. Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal wheel.
2. Constructed of aluminum.
3. Single-width-single-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate,
and fastened to shaft with set screws.
4. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub
riveted to backplate.
5. Statically and dynamically balanced.
6. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise
running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
G. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings:
1. Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, tapered roller bearings with double-
locking collars and two-piece, cast-iron housing.
2. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: L50 at 200,000 hours.
H. Belt Drives:
1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.
2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing;
dynamically balanced at factory. Keyed and securely attached to wheel
and motor shafts.
3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed
pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the
middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple
belt drives.
5. Readily accessible for maintenance.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 3 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements
of diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent,
prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting
vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension,
lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
I. Motors:
1. Motor enclosures: Open dripoff.
2. Motors are permanently lubricated, sealed, heavy duty ball bearing type
furnished at the specific voltage, phase, and enclosure.
J. Accessories:
1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same
material as housing.
3. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes.
4. Integral backdraft dampers.
5. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow.
6. Inlet Screens: For non ducted fans; grid screen of same material as
housing.
7. Vibration isolators.
2.3 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS (DIRECT DRIVE)
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
Loren Cook Model SQI or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Chicago Blower Corporation.
2. Cincinnati Fan.
3. New York Blower Company (The).
B. Description:
1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, direct-driven
centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor,
drive assembly, and support structure.
2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by
shipping limitations.
3. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch.
C. Disconnect Switches:
1. NEMA rated: 1
2. Positive electrical shut-off.
D. Housings:
1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff.
2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for
mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
3. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing.
4. Spun inlet cone with flange.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 4 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
5. Outlet flange.
6. Constructed of steel and coated with permatector.
7. Housing and bearing supports shall be constructed of welded steel
members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearing
assembly balancing up to a minimum of 10 horsepower.
E. Housing Supports and Drive Frame:
1. Housing supports are constructed of structural steel with formed flanges.
2. Drive frame is welded steel which supports the shaft and bearings and
reinforcement for the housing.
3. Prepunched mounting holes for installation.
4. Drive frame is coated with Permatector.
F. Backward-Inclined Wheels:
1. Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal wheel.
2. Constructed of aluminum.
3. Single-width-single-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate,
and fastened to shaft with set screws.
4. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub
riveted to backplate.
5. Statically and dynamically balanced.
6. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise
running tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
G. Motors:
1. Motors are permanently lubricated, sealed, heavy duty ball bearing type
furnished at the specific voltage, phase, and enclosure.
H. Accessories:
1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same
material as housing.
3. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes.
4. Integral backdraft dampers.
5. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow.
6. Inlet Screens: For non ducted fans; grid screen of same material as
housing.
7. Vibration isolators.
8. Provide variable speed controller.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final
location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 34 16 – PAGE 5 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting
points.
D. Equipment Mounting: Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring
vibration hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support weight of
centrifugal fans.
E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-
authorized service representative]:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction,
and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation.
Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. See Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 23 34 16
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 37 13 - PAGE 1 OF 2
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 233713 -DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, provide the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting
details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure
drop, and noise ratings.
2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation,
room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Register Grille:
1. Provide product by one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
b. Price Industries.
c. Titus.
d. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 1/2 inch apart.
5. Core Construction: Integral.
6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
7. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
8. Accessories
a. Steel opposed-blade damper with screwdriver slot operator
b. Filter
B. Fixed Lattice Face Plate :
1. Provide product by one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
b. Price Industries.
c. Titus.
d. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Steel, 12 gauge.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
4. Face Arrangement: 13/16" square holes on 1" centers.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 37 13 - PAGE 2 OF 2
MARCH 29, 2013
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to
ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets
and Inlets."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling/Wall-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general
arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations
have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise
criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where
indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other
items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final
location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to
allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns
indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 23 37 13
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 238126 -- SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for each type of product indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet
velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements,
and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15,
"Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1,
Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment,"
Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System
Start-Up."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
b. For Parts: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Daikin
2. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company.
3. Koldwave, Inc.; a Mestek company.
4. Lennox International Inc.
5. Mitsubishi Electric HVAC Advanced Products Division.
6. SANYO HVAC
7. Trane; a business of Ingersol Rand
8. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.2 INDOOR UNITS 5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS
A. Cassette Type Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Chassis: Galvanized steel, 24" x 24" square unit suspended from structure
with four-way grille fixed to bottom of cabinet.
2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and
thermal-expansion valve. Comply with AHRI 210/240.
3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
4. Fan Motors:
a. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
lubrication.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
b. Enclosure type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
c. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MGI.
d. Controllers, electrical devices & wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices & connections specified in Division 26 sections.
5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
6. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
7. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil
headers, and return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Depth: A minimum of 1" deep.
b. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent
overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
8. Accessories:
a. Provide mini condensate pump where specified on drawings. Field
installed
b. Provide fully insulated full port ball valve with service port installed in
each refrigerant line at each indoor unit.
c. Provide auxillary condensate detection device that is a field installed
accessory in addition to any factory installed condensate detection
devices.
B. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in white
color finish, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and
thermal-expansion valve. Comply with AHRI 210/240.
3. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal.
4. Fan Motors:
a. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent
lubrication.
b. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
c. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
d. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
6. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil
headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward
drain connection.
1) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) deep.
b. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent
overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
7. Accessories:
a. Provide mini condensate pump where specified on drawings. Field
installed.
b. Provide fully insulated full port ball valve with service port installed in
each refrigerant line at each indoor unit.
c. Provide auxillary condensate detection device that is a field installed
accessory in addition to any factory installed condensate detection
devices.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS)
A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with
removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and
mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage
ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on
vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and
current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
a. Compressor Type: Scroll, inverter driver.
b. Variable speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure
switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins
and liquid subcooler. Comply with AHRI 210/240.
3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff
thermostat.
4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F (-17 deg C).
7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Wall mounted to control compressor and evaporator fan, with the
following features:
1. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time
setting, operating mode, and fan speed.
2. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.
3. On/off, cool, heat & auto operation mode.
B. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory
cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction & liquid lines
with flared fittings at both ends.
1. Drain Hose: For condensate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting
devices securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-
mm-) thick, reinforced concrete base that is 4 inches (100 mm) larger, on each
side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with
concrete base.
D. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.
E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a
minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm).
F. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect
fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 81 26 – PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and
maintenance of unit.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION 23 81 26
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP FAN COIL UNITS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 1 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 238219 -- FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished
specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Maintenance schedules and repair
part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -
"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-
Conditioning."
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, cable trays, and partition assemblies.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of condensing units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Compressor failure.
b. Condenser coil leak.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP FAN COIL UNITS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 2 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish two spare filters for each filter installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
B. In the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings
that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each fan-coil unit is based on
the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other
manufacturers specified.
2.2 FAN-COIL UNITS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Carrier Corporation.
2. Dunham-Bush.
3. McQuay International.
4. Trane.
5. USA Coil & Air.
6. YORK International Corporation
7. ENVIRO-TEC
B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440,
ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.
C. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch (25-mm) thick, coated glass fiber or foil-
covered, closed-cell foam complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with
adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a
combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply
with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP FAN COIL UNITS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 3 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain
connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.
E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture.
F. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint
color as selected by Architect.
1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and
hinge and attached with safety chain; with integral stamped discharge
grilles.
G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
1. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV.
H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins
spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), rated for a minimum working
pressure of 200 psig (1378 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature
of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and drain valve.
I. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.
1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to
motor. Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-
steel, or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.
2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor
board.
3. Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug
connection.
J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with
wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service,
inlet, and outlet.
1. Two-way, modulating control valve for chilled-water coil.
2. Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig (2758-kPa) working pressure, and
operating temperatures from 33 to 211 deg F. Tag hose kits to
equipment designations.
a. Length: 24 inches (600 mm) maximum.
b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan-coil-unit connection size.
3. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze
ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating
and blowout-proof stem.
4. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 125-psig
(860-kPa) working pressure, 250-deg F maximum operating temperature;
with calibrated orifice or venturi, connections for portable differential
pressure meter with integral seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a
memory stop to retain set position.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig
(2070-kPa) working pressure at 250 deg F , with removable, corrosion-
resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP FAN COIL UNITS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 4 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over differential
pressure range of 2 to 80 psig (13.8 to 552 kPa).
6. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B);
125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted
cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port, ball-type blowdown valve
in drain connection.
7. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
8. Risers: ASTM B 88, Type L copper pipe with hose and ball valve for
system flushing.
K. Basic Unit Controls:
1. Control voltage transformer.
2. Wall-mounting thermostat with the following features:
a. Cool-off switch.
b. Fan on-auto switch.
c. Fan-speed switch.
d. Degree F indication.
3. Wall-mounting temperature sensor.
L. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical
connection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual
locations before fan-coil-unit installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Provide
vibration isolator bushing or rubber in shear isolators.
D. Verify locations of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with
Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches
(1525 mm) above finished floor.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL - NCP FAN COIL UNITS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 23 82 19 – PAGE 5 OF 5
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial
Completion.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install
piping package if shipped loose.
3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.
a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure
of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report
results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper
operation and electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of
Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit
actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other
than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.
END OF SECTION 238219
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 00 PAGE 1 of 3
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 260100 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Division.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements
for Division 26, Electrical work.
1.3 DIVISION 26 - DESCRIPTION:
A. The technical specifications of this Contract are arranged for the
convenience of the Owner and Contractor into Divisions of work. The
work of Division 26, Electrical, is further described in Specification
Sections of the 26000 Series and on contract drawings of the "E" series.
B. The organization of this work into Divisions shall not relieve the Prime
Contractor from providing all of the work shown on the complete set of
drawings or specified in the complete set of Specifications, whether or not
the individual subcontractors correctly identify their respective
responsibilities.
1.4 OTHER DIVISION SPECIFICATIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS WORK:
A. To the extent that the work of this Division or Contract includes the work
of other trades, the Contractor for this Division shall adhere to the
requirements of other specification sections. All General Construction
work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of the
appropriate Division. All mechanical work shall be performed in
accordance with appropriate Division 23 Sections.
1.5 WORK INCLUDED:
The work of this Division shall include providing all materials, labor, services,
permits and related work to furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning,
documented Electrical System including all work shown, specified or required for
proper system operation including but not limited to the following:
A. Provide Demolition and Removal of Existing Circuits, Devices, and
Fixtures, Where Shown, Including Removal of All Debris from Site and
Proper Disposal of Same.
B. Provide Additions and/or Modifications to Existing Electrical Panelboards.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 00 PAGE 2 of 3
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Provide Basic Materials and Methods.
D. Provide Electrical Equipment Identification.
E. Provide Equipment and Conductor Identification.
F. Provide Electrical Coordination Drawings.
G. Provide Motor Starters and Disconnects where required.
H. Provide Grounding System where shown.
I. Provide New Lighting Fixtures Including Appurtenances.
J. Provide Conduits, Boxes, Raceways for New Branch Circuits.
K. Provide Additions and/or Modifications to the Existing Fire Alarm System
L. Provide Testing of Equipment and Conductors.
M. Provide Relocations of Equipment and Lighting Fixtures Where Shown.
N. Provide Certificate of Compliance and Fees for Permits and Inspections.
O. Provide Openings in Existing and New Construction as Required for the
Work of this Division. Provide Fire Seal for All Penetrations.
P. Provide Sleeves and Inserts
Q. Provide Maintenance of System until Final Acceptance.
R. Provide Cooperation and Coordination with Owners Telecom. Vendors.
S. Provide Owner's Operation Instruction
1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Fire Alarm System Devices
2. Lighting Fixtures
3. Panels and Circuit Breakers
4. Smoke Detectors and Fire/Smoke Dampers
1.7 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A. The Owner’s telecommunication vendor shall install cabling and
faceplates for telephone, computer and television and audio visual. Final
terminations shall be performed by Owner's vendors.
1.8 ALTERNATES / ALLOWANCES:
A. Refer to Division 01 for a description regarding alternates/allowances, if
applicable.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 00 PAGE 3 of 3
MARCH 29, 2013
1.9 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS:
Division 26 shall be responsible to apply for, obtain and meet the requirements of
all permits and inspections required by jurisdictions for the work of Division 26.
Division 26 shall pay all fees associated with these permits and inspections.
1.10 CODE RULES AND ENGINEER INSPECTIONS:
A. The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of the National
Electrical Code and of the National Fire Protection Association. In
addition, all state, municipal or other codes, rules or regulations
applicable to the work shall be followed.
B. Final inspection of the complete electrical system shall be performed prior
to final payments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 See Applicable Division 26 Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 See Applicable Division 26 Sections
END OF SECTION 26 01 00
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 1 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 260101 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Documents and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections apply to the Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide Basic Materials and Methods as follows:
1. Conduit
2. Conduit Fittings
3. Sleeves, Inserts and Openings
4. Support Systems
5. Wireways/Wire Troughs
6. Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes
7. Conductors
8. Conductor Splicing Materials
9. Wiring Devices
10. Conductor Pulling Lubricant
11. Miscellaneous Painting
12. Waterproofing, Caulking and Sealing
13. Protection and Storage of Materials and the work
14. Lighting
15. Panelboards
16. Grounding
17. Telecommunication ground bar
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals for the following:
1. Wiring Devices
2. Panelboards
3. Transformers
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS – GENERAL:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 2 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
A. Conductors shall be annealed copper; 98% conductivity.
B. Minimum size conductors for general wiring shall be #12.
2.2 CONDUCTORS:
A. Conductors:
1. Conductors shall be annealed copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2. Grounding conductor shall have green color coded insulation.
3. Signal circuits shall be color coded using solid colors with
contrasting tracer color lines.
4. Panel feeders shall be copper conductors unless otherwise shown.
5. Aluminum conductors shall not be acceptable.
B. INSULATION:
1. 600 volts rating for building feeders and branch circuits.
2. 300 volts rating for signal systems operating at 50 volts or less.
3. # 12 through # 8 AWG: dry locations, use type THWN.
4. # 6 and larger in normally dry locations type THWN.
5. # 12 AWG and larger: under buildings, slab on grade, steam
tunnels, crawlspaces, boiler rooms, pump house, kitchen,
mechanical rooms, use type THWN.
Make: Anaconda, General Cable, Rome Cable, Circle, General Electric, Essex,
Okonite, Brand-Rex.
2.3 CONDUCTOR SPLICING MATERIALS:
A. Wires #8 and smaller: Pre-insulated solderless connectors.
B. Wires #6 through #4/0: Compression or split bolt type connectors as
manufactured by Dossert, Burndy, or T & B.
C. Wires larger than #4/0: Compression or split bolt type connectors with
minimum two pressure points per conductor.
D. Wire connectors or splicing means installed on conductors for direct burial
shall be UL listed for such.
2.4 CONDUCTOR PULLING LUBRICANT:
A. The cable lubricant shall meet the following performance specifications:
1. When subjected to a 100 lbs./ft. Normal force, between (type)
cable and (type) conduit, the lubricated cable system shall have a
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 3 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
coefficient of kinetic friction less than .25 (pulling force greater
than lbs./ft.)
2. The lubricant shall be U.L. (or CSA) listed.
3. When used on high voltage cable, the lubricant shall not affect the
volume resistivity of any semi-conducting jacket or insulation
shield present. The volume resistivity of the semi-conducting
material shall at no time increase more than 100% when tested
via the ICEA T-25-425 method, 90 degrees centigrade exposure,
7 day test, readings made at 23 degrees centigrade daily.
4. The lubricant shall not affect the tensile/elongation properties of
the cable jacket more than existing ICEA/NEMA aging
specifications allow.
5. The lubricant shall contain no waxes, greases, silicones, or
polyalkylene glycol oils or waxes.
B. Manufacturer: Polywater J. American Polywater Corporation, P.O. Box
53, Stillwater, Minnesota 55082.
2.5 CONDUIT:
A. Flexible Conduit:
1. Steel interlock type, galvanized, with galvanized steel fittings.
2. Complies with NEC Article 350 and U.L. standards for flexible
conduit.
3. Flex conduit to only be used for light fixture and motor connection,
whips no more than 6’ in length.
4. Make: Galflex or acceptable manufacturer.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
1. EMT shall be low carbon steel, with set screw type, concrete tight
fittings.
2. Exterior shall be galvanized by electrolytic process and extra coat
provided by bright dip in zinc chromate solution.
3. Interior shall be coated with baked plating process.
4. Make: Cerro, Republic, Allied Tube, Youngstown, Wheatland or
acceptable manufacturer.
C. Rigid Metallic Conduit (RGS)
1. Rigid galvanized steel, hot dipped threaded type.
2. Galvanized threaded malleable iron fittings.
3. Make: Cerro, Republic, Allied Tube, Youngstown, Wheatland
acceptable manufacturer.
2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS:
A. EMT:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 4 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
1. All fittings shall be U.L. listed steel or malleable iron.
2. Branch circuit conduits larger than 1” diameter and conduits
containing feeders serving panelboards shall have grounding type
bushings.
3. Set screw type fittings, Concrete tight as manufactured by Neer, OZ
Gedney, Bridgeport or acceptable manufacturer.
4. Compression connectors, squeeze type Efcor or acceptable
manufacturer.
B. Flexible:
1. Fittings shall be UL listed steel or mallable iron.
2. Fittings for flexible steel conduits shall be squeeze type as
manufactured by Thomas and Betts, Steel City or Appleton.
C. Liquidtight:
1. Fittings shall be malleable iron, tapered hub threads, with safe-
edge ground cone and double bevel sealing ring.
2. Fittings for liquid tight flexible conduits shall be screw-in type
manufactured by Thomas and Betts Company or Pittsburgh
Standard Conduit Company.
D. Rigid Conduit:
1. Bushings for metal conduit terminations shall be the nylon insulated
type throat, with grounding type locknut ahead of bushing.
2. Die cast zinc-alloy and pressure cast and indenter type fittings shall
not be approved. Provide steel or malleable iron only.
3. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Myers Electric Products,
Inc., Raco, T&B, General Electric Company or acceptable
manufacturer.
E. Die cast, pressure cast, potted metal or similar type fittings shall not be
used.
2.7 CONDUIT SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
A. Trapeze type hangers:
1. Steel horizontal members and threaded hanger rods.
2. Rods shall not be less than ½" diameter.
3. Make: Kindorf G-953 Series, or acceptable manufacturer in
Unistrut or B-line complete with all necessary bolts, screws,
angles, anchors, connection plates, straps, etc., as required to
perform the necessary functions.
B. Conduit Clamps and Supports:
1. Steel hangers and threaded hex nuts.
2. Kindorf C-149 series or acceptable manufacturer in Unistrut or B-
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 5 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
line complete with all necessary bolts, screws, angles, anchors,
connection plates, straps, etc as required to perform the necessary
functions.
2.8 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES:
A. Types:
1. Galvanized, stamped steel shall be provided when recessed in
construction or exposed on walls and ceilings in dry areas.
2. Deep condulet style with hubs, or Myers hubs for exposed work in
damp area or wet location or for weatherproof type outlets.
3. Large pullboxes shall require 14 gauge galvanized steel, fold and
weld construction; with 14 gauge galvanized and gasketed steel
cover secured in place by galvanized sheet metal screws on
maximum 10 inches centers. All cut edges to be free of burrs.
4. Provide cast iron, gasketed, watertight boxes where installed in
earth, surface mounted outdoors, where threaded connection is
needed.
B. Size: Provide as required for number and size of conduit and conductors.
Coordinate depth to suit wall depth and construction. Use special forms
and designs as required for outlet facilities.
C. Covers: Provide design and style to suit outlet box and electric facility.
Provide for all unused or non-designated boxes. NEMA 1, 12, 3R, rating
for area environment and use watertight cover with gasket for exterior
boxes.
D. Fixture Studs: Use 3/8 inch studs and securely fastened to support
fixtures.
E. Make: Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, O.Z. Gedney, National, Steel City, Raco,
Pyle-National.
2.9 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS:
A. "Link-seal" assembly as manufactured by Thunderline (see Execution for
locations).
B. Schedule 40 steel pipe, packed with fire barrier wool and caulk (see
Execution for locations).
C. Fire barrier wool and caulk. No sleeve necessary (see Execution for
locations).
D. Where 3 hour fire rating is required, use split collar fire seal with sleeve.
2.10 WIRE WAYS AND WIRE TROUGH:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 6 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
A. Use hinged cover type wire way with provisions for full lay-in along the
entire length of run.
B. Wire way shall be steel, enclosed with gray enamel finish.
C. Use JK sectional NEMA dust resistant, oil tight type where subjected to
moisture, in pump rooms, mechanical, electric and fan rooms, exterior
wall, shops, maintenance shop, and similar locations.
D. Knockouts along runs.
E. Provide all elbows, tees, pullboxes, fittings, hangers, reducers, supports,
etc., to meet installation requirements.
F. Size as shown on drawings or code size where not noted.
G. Make: Square D "Square Duct" or acceptable manufacturer by Hoffman,
General Electric, Meco.
2.11 WIRING DEVICES:
A. Receptacle, Duplex:
1. Grounding type, parallel blade with standard or grounding caps,
high strength nylon construction.
2. For side or back wiring, with break off strip for two circuit wiring.
3. U.L. listed, 20 amp circuit rating, NEMA type 5-20R.
4. Extra hard use specification grade.
5. Make: Pass & Seymour PT5362A or acceptable manufacturer.
B. Switches, Local:
1. Toggle operated A.C. type.
2. Specification grade, slow make, slow break.
3. 20 amperes at 120V rating.
4. Make: Sierra, Arrow-Hart, circle F, Slater, P&S, Hubbell HBL
1221L single pole, HBL 1223L three way, Hubbell HBL 1224 four
way or acceptable manufacturer.
2.12 CEILING PLATES
A. Round ceiling plate, white finish, steel, to cover existing cast-in-place
ceiling boxes.
B. Mulberry Model 40430 or acceptable manufacturer.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 7 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
2.13 WARRANTY:
A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty on all equipment, materials and
products. Where shown or specified, provide manufacturer's extended
warranty.
2.14 PANELBOARDS:
A. Panelboards shall be type “Lighting and Power Distribution”, with 22,000
AIC interrupting rating unless noted otherwise. Load centers shall not be
permitted. Panelboards shall be fully rated and shall include main
breakers, and type written circuit directory.
2.15 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Transformers shall be NEMA Type TP-1, dry-type, copper windings, with
5 secondary taps, suitable for wall or floor mounting; size and voltage as
shown on Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COLOR CODING AND NUMBERING:
A. Color coding for branch circuits and feeders.
1. 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire Wye system.
a. Phase A – Black
b. Phase B – Red
c. Phase C – Blue
d. Neutral – White
e. Grounding Conductor – Green
2. 277/480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, Wye system
a. Phase A – Brown
b. Phase B – Orange
c. Phase C – Yellow
d. Neutral – Gray
e. Grounding Conductor – Green
3. 120/240 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, Delta system
a. Phase A – Black
b. Phase B – Orange (wild leg)
c. Phase C – Blue
d. Neutral – White
e. Grounding Conductor – Green
4. Identify grounded (neutral) conductors in accordance with NEC
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 8 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
Article 200 when it is shared or common raceways and enclosures
B. Number code all control and instrumentation wiring at termination points.
3.2 SPARE RECEPTACLES
A. Provide four (4) additional spare TVSS receptacles.
3.3 LAYING OUT WORK
A. Conform to Section 013100 – Project Coordination
3.4 MISCELLANEOUS PAINTING:
A. Conform to Section 099123 – Interior Painting
B. Conform to Section 011000 – Summary of Work
C. Conform to Section 011200 – Multiple Contract Summary
D. Conform to Section 017329 – Cutting and Patching
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
A. Conform to Section 013100 – Project Coordination
B. Conform to Section 014000 – Quality Control Service
3.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION:
A. Install all equipment to be free of transmission of noise and vibration to
occupied spaces. Arrange isolated equipment so that it does not contact
members of the building structure, ceiling grids, piping, conduits or
ductwork.
B. Provide replacement at no cost to the Owner of any pump, motor, motor
starter, or lighting fixture, transformer, UPS system, other equipment which
in the opinion of the Engineers produces excessive vibration or noise.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND INITIAL LUBRICATION:
A. Conform to Section 014000 – Quality Control Services
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 9 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
3.8 EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT AND TESTING:
A. Conform to Section 014000 – Quality Control Services
3.9 CONDUITS:
A. General:
1. Securely support conduit from building construction, separately
from outlets and boxes which are secured to the building.
Supports shall be spaced at intervals of eight (8) feet maximum or
as required by NEC code.
2. Conduit runs shall be concealed unless otherwise specified. Do
not expose in finished room unless specifically permitted.
3. Conduit runs shall be exposed in electrical, mechanical and fan
rooms.
4. Conduit runs shall be installed neatly and parallel to ceilings,
walls, and floors.
5. All conduits and fittings on exposed work shall be secured by
means of metal clips on back plates.
6. Avoid installation adjacent to hot surfaces. Raceways shall be
spaced from heat sources as follows:
a. Steam: no conduit within 12 inches of outside surface of
insulation.
b. Hot water piping: 6 inches minimum from outside surface
of insulation.
7. Provide one pull box or junction box per three 90 bends in any one
conduit run.
8. Plug openings until wire is installed and ream conduit joints and
ends before installation. Wires shall not be pulled until conduit
system is completed in all details.
9. Conduits feeding panelboards; pull boxes.
a. Terminations at each pullbox, panelboard and switch
board shall have double locknut (one inside and one
outside)
b. Provide a minimum of two 1 inch conduit stubs from each
flush mounted panelboard to an accessible ceiling space
above the panel, in an adjacent area or at the ceiling line.
10. Conduit terminating in gasketed enclosures shall be terminated
with conduit hubs or Myers hubs.
11. Avoid installing conduits in water or where excessive moisture
exists. For conduits terminating to boxes in wet areas, use Myers
hub fittings.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 10 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
B. EMT:
1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work.
C. Liquidtight Conduit:
1. Use for terminating connection for motors, compressors, air
conditioners, sound equipment and dry type transformers.
2. Provide proper fittings with insulated throats. Provide green wire
ground.
3. Use Liquidtight conduit and fittings in outdoor locations and in pump
rooms, garages, elevator pits and other locations subjected to
moisture.
4. Use for all motor transformer terminations and other equipment
where vibration is present.
D. Flexible Conduit:
1. Install as terminating connection for motors, compressors, air
conditioners, sound equipment and dry type transformers in dry
areas as shown or scheduled.
2. Install green wire ground in all flexible conduit.
3. Flex conduit to be used only for light fixtures and motor
connections, whips no more than 6’ in length.
E. RGS:
1. Use in dry locations for concealed or exposed work where shown.
2. Use in or under concrete pours.
3. Use where exposed to weather.
4. Where run in earth and below slab on grade, encase conduit in 1-
1/2” concrete envelope unless otherwise noted.
5. Use where noted on drawings.
3.10 CABLE LUBRICATION AND LUBRICANT:
1. The cable jacket and/or conduit walls shall be completely lubricated when
cable is pulled into conduit. The lubricant shall be applied immediately
before or during the pull.
2. Minimum quantities of lubricant are as follows:
a. 1 quart of lubricant per 100 feet of 1 inch conduit.
b. 2 quarts of lubricant per 100 feet of 2 inch conduit.
c. 3 quarts of lubricant per 100 feet of 3 inch conduit.
d. 1 gallon of lubricant per 100 feet of 4 inch conduit.
3. This quantity shall be increased as needed for difficult pulling situations
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 11 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
(high temperatures, multiple bends, poorly placed conduit, etc.)
4. Cable attachments for pulling shall be patent cable grips, or other devices
subject to the Owner's approval. In using woven basket type grips on
covered cable, care shall be taken to avoid damage to the cable and seal,
which shall be marked up and maintained during cable installation.
Difficult pulling is not anticipated; if unduly difficult pulling occurs, the
Contractor shall check pull required and suspend further pulling until
further procedure has been approved by the Owner. Maximum pull
tension shall not exceed recommended value for the cable when
measured by tension dynamometer.
5. Cable pulling during low temperatures is subject to review by the Owner
and shall be discontinued when, in the Owner's and Engineers opinion,
the cable may be damaged.
6. The Contractor shall keep records of all cables pulled, meggered and
terminated. Exact lengths of cables installed shall be supplied to the
Owner.
3.11 CONDUIT FITTINGS:
A. EMT:
1. Provide EMT connector and nylon bushing at all EMT plain end
terminations for power, CATV, communications and computer.
2. Use set screw type, concrete tight indoors, dry locations.
3. Use compression connectors, squeeze type in wet locations.
B. RGS:
1. Provide galvanized steel locknuts at each termination
unless hubs are used.
2. Use sealing locknuts for all wet/damp areas.
3. Use grounding type locknuts for rigid terminations not equipped
with grounding bushings.
3.12 CONDUIT HANGERS:
A. General:
1. Investigate thoroughly, Architectural and Shop Drawings related to
work, to determine how equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, etc,
are to be supported, mounted or suspended. Provide extra steel,
bolts, inserts, pipe stand brackets, or any other items required for
proper support. Provide supporting accessories where required,
whether or not shown on the drawings. Where directed, furnish
drawings showing supports, etc., for approval.
2. Conduit hanger rods in areas where hot dipped galvanized conduit
is installed shall be galvanized steel, sprayed with one coat of
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 12 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
Rustoleum paint.
3. Size support member within load rating of member section, and
without visible deflection.
4. Mount conduit on top of support member unless space
considerations prevent installation; use conduit clamps.
5. Provide channels for racking up conduit, trapeze, suspensions,
cable racks, panel racks, etc., as shown and as required and
provide poured-in-place inserts for supporting channels.
B. Conduit Clamps:
1. Single conduits shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe
clamps in combination with one-screw back plates to raise
conduits from the surface.
C. Trapeze Hangers:
1. Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported by means of trapeze
hangers, keeping conduits as high as possible with minimal beads
and offsets in height.
3.13 SURFACE RACEWAYS:
A. Surface Raceways:
1. Blank cover raceways shall be provided where shown, or as
approved in advance by the Engineer.
2. Secure to structure at 5 foot intervals.
3. All surface boxes to be independently secured to structure.
4. Provide separate green grounding wire within each surface
raceway and extend back to ground of serving panelboard.
5. Paint all raceways to match adjacent walls.
3.14 CONDUCTOR SPLICING MATERIALS:
A. Splices and connections for lighting and receptacles shall be made in
accessible outlets, pullboxes or junction boxes.
B. Insulate all splices, taps and connections for lighting and receptacles with
U.L. labeled gauge plastic tape or molded composition caps.
C. Splices shall not be made except where called for by the drawings, or
where specifically permitted by the Owner. Where splices are permitted,
they shall be made in a neat, workmanlike and approved manner by
those specialized in this class of work, close attention being paid to all
splices with particular attention to splices on higher voltages. Splices
shall be made by the Contractor for each type of wire or cable in
accordance with instruction issued by Cable Manufacturers and the
Owner. Before splicing, insulated cables shall have conductor insulation
stepped and bound or penciled for recommended distances back from
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 13 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
splices to provide a long leakage path. After splicing, insulation equal to
that on the spliced conductors shall be applied at each splice. In baring
conductors for splices, care shall be taken to avoid nicking strands.
3.15 CONDUCTORS:
A. All wire and cable shall be installed in an approved raceway.
B. Provide wire and cable in conduit for all feeders, motor circuits, lighting
circuits, receptacle circuits, equipment circuits, etc., as shown on
drawings.
C. Coil slack wire at outlets, inside the outlet boxes and seal the outlet
opening with cardboard or fiber plug to prevent entrance of concrete
plaster or paint. Provide separate neutrals for all single phase circuits.
D. Tag all feeders, subfeeders, special system wiring and control wiring in
each pullbox/gutter space, denoting points of origin/termination of wires.
E. Install a maximum of 3 phase and one neutral conductor in any one
feeder or branch circuit conduit unless otherwise directed by Engineer.
F. Provide supports for conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with
NEC, Article 300-19.
G. Flexible conduit used as connection to any equipment shall contain
separate green grounding wire run back to ground bus of serving
panelboard.
H. Provide #12 AWG minimum size for branch circuit and emergency system
wiring, #14 AWG minimum size for signal circuits.
I. All wires #12 and larger and wiring to motor or other fixed equipment shall
be stranded type.
J. Provide #10 minimum size for branch circuit run which exceed 100 feet;
unless otherwise directed.
K. The neutral wire shall be identified throughout the system. Feeders shall
be identified at the source and at all boxes with panel make and phase
(A,B,C).
L. Included in the work covered under this section is the cutting or drilling of
entrance holes into enclosures, equipment terminal boxes and outlet
boxes for entrance of cable not in conduit, as well as the work of cutting
and drilling of holes in miscellaneous plates located in the path of cable
runs. Entrance holes for cable shall be installed around cable, as part of
the work of installing cable, sealing bushings, Crouse-Hinds type: "CGB"
or Owner approved equal, or conduit bushings where these alone are
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 14 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
permissible. The work shall also include the work of packing or sealing at
conduit bushings after cables are pulled, using unoiled Oakum and JM
Dux-seal or Owner approved equal.
M. Cables shall be formed to avoid sharp bends or edges of conduit
bushings upon entering or leaving conduit terminations, and insulated
wiring to approximately six inch intervals between conduit and terminals.
Where outlet box, cabinet, cubicle, switchgear or other terminal points for
cable are equipped with cable or wiring trays, troughs or gutters.
Contractor shall pull sufficient length of each cable to permit neat
arrangement of all entering cables, with leads formed and cabled or
clamped as each conductor is brought to its terminal connection. No
tangle box work will be accepted.
N. Where reasonable practicable , the minimum radius to which an insulated
conductor is bent, whether permanently or temporarily during installation,
shall be ten times the diameter over the outer covering.
O. Making terminal connections shall be included as part of the work, except
as specifically noted. At points where the conductor and cable insulation
will be terminated, terminations shall be made in a neat, workmanlike and
approved manner by men specialized in this class of work, particular
attention being given to higher voltage terminations, shielded conductor
terminations and coaxial cable terminations. Terminations shall be made
by the Contractor for each type of wire or cable in accordance with
instructions issued by the Owner. Spare cables shall be trimmed, taped
and bundled neatly within the cabinet so their presence will not interfere
with connected terminations. They shall be trimmed to a length such that
they can be made up and connected to the farthest terminal block within
the cabinet.
P. Before any cable terminal connections are made, conductors shall be
rung out. Connections shall be made according to wiring diagrams.
Polarity or phasing shall be checked before final connections are made,
and corrections of polarity, phasing or rotation shall be made without
additional cost to the Owner.
Q. Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring
diagrams, using wire numbers established by the Owner for the various
control circuits. It is the intent that the Contractor shall terminate the
cables which he installs, except as specifically noted.
R. When control cables are to be fanned out and cabled together with cord,
Contractor shall make connections to terminal blocks, and test equipment
for proper operation before cables are corded together. If there is any
question as to proper connection, the Contractor shall make temporary
connection with sufficient length of cable so that cable can be switched to
another terminal, without splicing cable.
S. After pulling and splicing but before making cable terminal connections,
the Contractor shall expose ends, clear each conductor, and make the
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 15 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
required Megger test on all circuits except lighting circuits. Contractor
shall test cables for motors, power, and control, with a Megger insulation
testing instrument (Associated Research, Inc., Megohmmeter) before
equipment is energized. In the event insulation is deficient, repeat
Megger testing shall be accomplished after corrective measures have
been applied. Extreme care shall be exercised in meggering so as not to
put excessive voltage on instrumentation and electronic equipment and
thereby damage such devices.
The Contractor shall megger all power feed cables for 10 to 15 sec., at
4000 volts on apparatus rated 2500 volts, 1000 volts on apparatus rated
550 volts to 2500 volts and 500 volts on apparatus rated less than 500
volts. The cable shall be meggered first on the reel before pulling and
then again on a cable-by-cable basis after being cut and pulled.
T. A check shall be made of all external and internal wiring for loose
connections, cable sizing and proper terminations per the elementary and
connection drawings listed and attached with specification.
U. All wiring systems shall be thoroughly checked before placing the system
in service, for grounds, short circuits and conformity to wiring diagrams.
3.16 CONDUCTOR CIRCUITING:
A. Lighting, receptacles and special circuits:
1. Lighting circuits: provide lighting arrangement as shown or 15
amperes maximum per circuit where not otherwise shown.
2. Receptacle circuits: provide 5 convenience outlets maximum per
circuit unless otherwise shown or specified.
3. Special receptacle circuits: provide as indicated on drawings and
as specified under special items of equipment and provide
separate green conductor for grounding receptacles to panel
ground bus. This includes UPS dedicate single receptacle for
Telecommunication Rooms.
B. Power and Control Circuits:
1. General requirements:
a. Provide all power wiring. Install in conduit and make all
connections to disconnect switches, motor controllers,
motor and other items of electrical equipment shown on
drawing details and schedules.
b. Provide control wiring only as shown on electric equipment
schedule and plan details. Install in conduit and make
connections to motors, motor controllers, control devices,
etc., including the mounting of all control devices furnished
by others.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 16 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
c. Verify exact location and rating of all motors, controllers,
control devices, etc., with other contractors before
roughing.
d. Power and control wiring may be combined in common
conduit by increasing conductor or conduit sizes as
required by code.
e. Provide minimum working clearances as required by NEC
Article 110-16 and as shown on the drawings.
2. Wiring diagrams:
a. Any wiring diagrams shown on drawings for hookup of
equipment furnished by others, are approximate and are
for bidding purposes only
b. Obtain wiring diagrams, certified correct for the job, from
respective Contractor for all equipment and systems
furnished by them.
c. Install all work in accordance with certified wiring diagrams.
3. Control devices:
a. Do not accept control devices from other Contractors
unless they are properly tagged and furnished with
circuiting information.
3.17 LIGHTING CIRCUIT CONTROL DEVICES AND RECEPTACLES:
A. All devices shall be mounted within a steel box.
B. All receptacles shall be mounted with box aligned in a vertical direction
with ground slot at bottom of receptacle. In those areas where vertical
space is not available such as under fin radiation, cabinets and above
backsplash, mount horizontally with ground slot at right.
C. Provide circuit identification of lighting junction boxes and wall switches in
each Telecommunication room as called for
3.18 WALL PLATES:
A. Submit samples as requested by Architect/Engineer.
B. Provide special plates fabricated for devices shown ganged together at
one location and provide special engraving for switch plates covering
special utility switches as shown on drawings.
C. Special finish plates will be required where so noted on drawings or
included in specifications. Sample of finishes will be furnished to
Architect/Engineer for approval when so requested.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 17 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Provide blank matching coverplates for outlets not used.
E. Coverplates for telephone, dimmer controls, etc., shall match device
plates in each area.
3.19 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULLBOXES:
A. Flush recessed wherever possible and securely supported from building
construction.
B. Where outlet boxes are installed in exposed block walls, locate at corner
of block. Locate conduit as required to meet block conditions.
Coordinate with other Divisions.
C. Identify junction boxes for particular service such as power, lighting,
grounding, fire alarm, etc. Label with suitable tags or use stencil lettering.
D. Locate where shown or required for outlet facilities and where shown or
required for installing wire or cable. Make accessible after completion of
construction; Electric Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with
other divisions. Junction and pullboxes shall not be located in finished
room unless specifically permitted.
E. Mounting height of boxes shall be as scheduled.
3.20 PREVENTION OF CORROSION:
A. Protect all metallic materials against corrosion.
B. Aluminum shall not be used in contact earth nor embedded in concrete.
Where connected to dissimilar metal, protect by approved fittings and
treatment.
C. Hot dip galvanize all ferrous metal materials such as bolts, braces, boxes,
bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, washers, and
miscellaneous parts which are not made of corrosion-resistant steel. Use
stainless steel fasteners in wet locations and out of doors.
D. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A-123 or A-153.
3.21 PAINTING:
A. General Requirements:
1. Painting shall be provided as outlined hereafter.
2. Clean all surfaces of moisture, rust, plaster, dirt, dust, and foreign
matter before painting.
3. Apply full even coats as required to provide acceptable finish.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 18 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
4. Apply finish coat just before final acceptance.
5. Protect all other surfaces with drop cloths. masking tape, etc.
6. Protect equipment and internal parts with making tape.
7. Factory enamel-finished equipment not to be painted, EXCEPT
when rusted or otherwise damaged; then paint as directed or if
specifically called for hereinafter.
8. Appearance to be approved; repaint if required.
B. Paint all work of this division in the following areas:
1. Boiler Room, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Electrical Equipment
Rooms, Penthouses, Fan Rooms, all work of this contract
exposed to the weather, and where specifically called for.
a. Bare pipes, conduit, supports, all supports, mounting
boards/panels, metal jackets, etc., also paint equipment
not supplied with factory finished surface.
1) First Coat: Pratt and Lambert "Effecto" primer
unless equipment supplied with factory prime coat.
2) Second Coat: Pratt and Lambert "Effecto" enamel.
3) Color as selected by engineer/architect.
4) Additional coats as required.
3.22 FIRESTOPPING, WATERPROOFING, CAULKING AND SEALING:
A. Opening Through Fire/Smoke Walls and Floors:
1. Install work per NFPA.
2. Provide sleeves for ducts and pipe anchor duct sleeves with angle
iron.
3. Comply with Division 078413 – Penetrating Firestopping
3.23 TESTS:
A. General:
1. Perform all operations required for the complete testing of all
systems, equipment and related work as shown on drawings or
specified herein and in accordance with all applicable
requirements of the specifications.
2. Before final acceptance, all specified tests shall be completed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative, who shall be
sole judge of the acceptability of such tests and who may direct
the performance of any such additional tests as he deems
necessary in order to determine the acceptability of the systems,
equipment, material and workmanship. Any additional tests
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 01 01 PAGE 19 of 19
MARCH 29, 2013
required by the Engineer will be made at no additional costs to
Owner.
3. All protective equipment shall be actuated in a manner that clearly
demonstrates their work ability and operation.
4. Demonstrate the ability of each and every piece of equipment to
meet the design and operating requirements indicated on the
drawings.
5. The inspection and test by the Owner or Engineer of any articles
or lots thereof , or failure to inspect and accept or reject any article
or lots thereof, shall not relieve the Contractor from any
responsibility regarding defects or other failure to meet the
Specification requirements which may be discovered prior to final
acceptance. Except as otherwise provided in the Specification,
final acceptance shall be conclusive except as regards any latent
defects, fraud, or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud.
6. Acceptance to the material and/or equipment and the waiving of
test thereof, shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for furnishing material and/or equipment meeting the
requirements of these Specifications.
END OF SECTION 26 01 01
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 1 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
applies to the Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented
grounding system including all work shown, specified, or required for
proper system operation.
B. All grounding and grounding circuitry shall equal or exceed the
requirements of NEC, latest issue, Article 250.
C. The raceway system which includes all metal conduit, wireways,
pullboxes, junction boxes, bus ducts, built-up enclosures, enclosures,
motor frames, etc., shall be made to form a continuous, conducting
permanent ground circuit of the lowest practical impedance to enhance
the safe conduction of ground fault currents and to prevent objectionable
differences in voltage between metal non-load current carrying parts of
the electrical system.
D. In addition to the raceway system ground, an additional green wire
ground shall be run in each raceway, sized for the largest circuit in the
raceway.
E. Telecommunications ground system consists of telecommunications
ground bar (TGB) in all ITR’s and MTR’s. Refer to drawing for TGB type
and location. Minimum #6 grounding riser between each ITR and MTR
per riser diagram on drawings. Bonding in each ITR and MTR shall be
from the TGB in each room to the following: network equipment racks
and cabinets, cable runways, cable trays, metallic cable sheaths and
raised floor system (if existing).
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide product data for each type of ground bar and associated ground
lugs, at a minimum.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 2 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
1.4 DEFINITIONS:
A. Earth: interpreted as absolute ground, a theoretical location of zero
electrical potential.
B. Ground: interpreted as a made conducting connection to earth by
employing such devices as a driven metal rod, a buried metal plate, a
metallic water pipe, etc., or any multiple or combination of these devices,
and the conductors which may interconnect any of the foregoing.
C. System ground: interpreted as a low impedance made conducting
ground plane or system, with a conducting connection to ground,
established for the benefit of a particular electrical system or related
systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS:
A. All exposed grounding conductors such as bars, straps, cables, flexible
jumpers, braids, shunts, etc., shall be bare copper unless specifically
noted or approved otherwise.
B. Cable size shall be as required by NEC Code, Section 250, stranded, soft
drawn or soft annealed, unless otherwise shown on plans or specified.
C. Cable insulation type and color shall be as shown or as specified.
D. Manufacturer to be same as specified in Section 260101 - Basic Materials
and Methods.
2.2 CONNECTORS, CLAMPS, TERMINALS:
A. Mechanical connectors and clamps shall be silicon bronze.
B. Solderless compression terminals shall be copper, long-barrel, two-bolt.
C. Make: Anderson, Burndy, Penn-Union, T&B, approved for use intended.
2.3 SOLDER:
A. Solder prohibited for connections, except for high voltage cable metallic
tape shields.
2.4 MOLDED FUSION WELDS:
A. Process shall be "Cadweld," "Metalweld," "Thermoweld."
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 3 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
2.5 HARDWARE:
A. All hardware shall be silicon bronze alloy.
B. Make: "Durium," "Everdur."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. Bare copper bars, cables, fittings, etc., shall not be installed in cinder fill
nor shall be covered with soil containing cinders or other corrosive
material.
B. Cables shall be installed with enough slack to prevent breaking stresses.
C. All grounding conductors subject to mechanical damage shall be
protected by rigid steel conduit or other suitable steel guards and in all
cases where so protected shall be permanently and effectively grounded
to said enclosure at each end of its length.
D. Where grounding conductors pass through floor slabs, walls, etc., and are
not encased in metal conduit, they shall be sleeved in fiber, or approved
non-metallic conduit.
E. All equipment ground bus, ground pads, frames, enclosures, etc., shall
have surfaces at point of connection thoroughly cleaned and brightened
just prior to actually making the connection. Touch-up damaged painted
surfaces.
F. Splices in wire or cable grounding conductors are prohibited.
3.2 INSTALLATION, RACEWAY SYSTEMS:
A. All metal supports, cable trays, messenger cables, frames, brackets,
races, etc., for any part of the raceway system, panels, switches, boxes,
starters, controls, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with
the raceway system, or which are subject to vibration and loosening, shall
be bonded to the raceway system, the size of the bonding conductor in
accordance with NEC Table 250-94.
B. Termination of rigid conduit at all boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall
be made up tightly with a double locknut arrangement and a bushing,
bushings being of the insulated type where required by NEC.
C. Conduit which runs to or from all boxes, cabinets, or enclosures having
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 4 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
concentric or eccentric knockouts which partially perforate the metal
around the conduit and hence impair the continuity of system ground
circuits shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with
NEC Table 250-95 connected between a grounding type bushing/locknut
on the conduit and a ground bus or stud inside the box, cabinet, or
enclosure and attached thereto.
D. Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways
shall be provided with bonding jumpers sized in accordance with NEC
Table 250-95.
E. Where flexible metallic conduit or liquid tight conduit is used, a bonding
jumper shall be provided, sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95.
F. All non-metallic runs of conduit or raceway shall be provided with a
system ground conductor sized according to Table 250-95.
G. Where conduit enters or leaves any electrical enclosure with removable
coverplates, provide conduit grounding bushings and bonding jumpers
sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95 between the grounding
bushings and the enclosure rigid frame or ground bus.
H. The ground conductors contained in the interstices of interlocked armor
cable shall be connected to ground at every splice and termination point.
3.3 INSTALLATION, ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURAL STEEL:
A. Location of attachment bonds of ground conductors shall be at points not
subject to mechanical damage, but if possible where accessible for
inspection.
B. Attach preferably by molded fusion welding process.
C. Where welding is prohibited, attach by bolting, 7/16 inch hole in steel, 3/8
inch silicon bronze bolt, bolt end peened, steel surface bright and flat prior
to bolting, just prior to bolting contact surfaces lightly coated with Vaseline
or "NO-OX-ID-A Special."
3.4 INSTALLATION, SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
A. The neutral conductor of each and every low voltage, single or polyphase,
system or distribution system, except special isolated double insulated
systems, shall be solidly connected at one point only; at the main
secondary switchgear; to system ground and shall be sized for current
carrying capacity, not to be less than the following, which are listed in
preferential order:
a. As shown or specified.
b. As required by NEC, latest issue, Table 250-95.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP GROUNDING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 26 – PAGE 5 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
c. Not less than 25 percent of the transformer full load current or
main protective device rating, whichever is greater, based on
NEMA standard bus size.
B. Provide equipment grounding conductor, green colored insulation, with
phase conductors, to primary side of all transformers rated 600 volts or
less circuited to case and secondary neutral bushing, to motors, to motor
control equipment, and to all convenience outlets, insulation shall be
same type as phase conductors.
C. Transformer secondary neutral bushings shall also to be circuited to
nearest metallic water pipe, building steel, or ground rod.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 1 of 4
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
applies to the Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented Electrical
Equipment Identification System including all work shown, specified, or
required for proper system operation.
B. Under this Section provide equipment and circuit identification as follows:
1. Typewritten panel directories with duplicates on As-Built
Drawings, for all new or existing altered panels.
2. Panelboard nameplates
3. Panelboard breaker identification tags
4. Telecom Ground Bar nameplates and identification tags, for all
new or modified bars.
5. Telecom Grounding Riser Conductor nameplates and
identification tags, for all new or modified risers.
6. Wiring color code
7. Wiring labeling
8. Junction box marking (Incl. Telecom Branch circuits and Lighting)
9. UPS and convenience power receptacles (Incl. Telecom Branch
circuits)
10. Motor starter/disconnect nameplates
11. New Fire Alarm devices
12. New Fire Alarm junction box covers paint to Owner’s color code.
13. Panelboard voltage marking
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Factory produced panelboard nameplates included in Section 26 24 16.
B. Color code for conductors provided in Section 26 01 01.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 2 of 4
MARCH 29, 2013
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide product data for each new Telecom Ground Bar nameplates, per
drawing A4.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
A. Legend Plates:
1. Two ply, 1/16” thick flexible plastic legend plates, front etched with
minimum 3/16” Gothic letters. Provide adhesive backing and a
minimum of two 5/32” diameter screw holes. Plate size shall be
minimum 1” x 3”. Multi-layer, non-conductive material, machine-
engraved with proper designation.
2. C & M Name Shop, Syracuse, or acceptable manufacturer.
3. Stick on computer printed labels shall not be accepted.
B. Stencils:
1. Die cut, capital letters.
2. Letters 3/8” minimum height.
C. Wire Markers:
1. Adhesive backed mylar or fabric material with printed markings.
2. Brady or equivalent.
D. Voltage Markers
1. Voltage markers shall be bright orange with black letters. Brady
Style B (1-1/8” by 4-1/2”) or acceptable manufacturer. Examples:
Three Phase Single Phase Three Phase
208 volts 240 volts 480 volts
120 volts 120 volts 277 volts
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 IDENTIFICATION, GENERAL:
A. Equipment name and number as shown on Drawings to be used for
equipment identification.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 3 of 4
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Disconnect switches, starters, control, etc., serving utilized equipment
shall be labeled on front cover.
C. All duplex receptacles, single UPS receptacles, light switches/circuits,
Telecom Ground Bars, Telelcom grounding conductors and lugs, fire
initiation devices, etc, serving any equipment in Telecommunication
rooms, shall be labeled with machine printed wrap around labels, with
panel and C/B information. .
D. All Telecom Ground Bars and Telelcom grounding conductors in
Telecommunication rooms, shall be labeled with legend plated, as
described in this section.
E. Step-down transformers shall be labeled with primary/secondary
voltages.
F. Utilized equipment which does not have service voltage clearly indicated
shall also be labeled by the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer.
G. Starters or control panels with interlock shall be provided with a warning
sign to indicate separate control voltage and may be energized. Warning
sign shall be mounted inside enclosure.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS:
A. Securely fastened to equipment to be identified with adhesive material
and plated screws.
B. Locate on front of equipment to be identified in neat manner, plumb and
true.
C. All power supply equipment; i.e., branch circuit breakers, equipment
disconnect switches, motor starters, etc. to be labeled to identify function
and/or load served.
3.3 STENCILED LABELS:
A. To be used only on equipment in unfinished areas.
B. Obtain Engineer's approval.
C. Locate on front of equipment to be identified in neat manner, plumb and
true.
3.4 WIRE MARKERS:
A. Install approximately 2” from wire ends.
B. All wiring to be identified via labeling at all ends, in junction and pull
boxes, in panelboards, at equipment terminations, at terminal boards
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 05 53 – PAGE 4 of 4
MARCH 29, 2013
and/or cabinets. Wiring to be identified for continuity.
3.5 DIRECTORIES:
A. Typewritten only; handwritten not acceptable.
B. Install in a manner to be legible but protected from physical damage
under conditions of normal use.
C. Room names to be referenced on directory along with load supplied.
3.6 MATERIALS TO BE LABELED:
A. Directories: Update existing panelboards to include new load served.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 29 10 – PAGE 1 of 3
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 262910 - MOTOR STARTERS & DISCONNECTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
applies to the Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide motor starters and disconnects, including all work shown,
specified, or required for proper system operation.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. The combination starters and protection devices in this specification shall
be designed and manufactured according to latest revision of the
following standards (unless otherwise noted).
1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. - Latest issue
2. CSA C22.2 No. 14 - Industrial Control Equipment. - Latest issue
3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers,
Contactors and Overload Relays, Rated Not More than 2000 Volts
AC or 750 Volts DC. - Latest issue
4. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. - Latest issue
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals for the following:
1. Disconnect Switches
2. Starters
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. All products in this section shall be by General Electric Company, Square
D or Cutler-Hammer. These Manufacturers are University Standard, no
other Manufacturers shall be accepted.
2.2 CLASSIFICATION/ASSEMBLY:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 29 10 – PAGE 2 of 3
MARCH 29, 2013
A. All products to be heavy duty grade classification, NEMA type as
scheduled on drawings. General duty products not accepted.
B. All products shall be factory assembled and wired and shall be UL
approved. Assemblies fabricated by Contractor shall not be accepted.
C. Units shall be horsepower rated for load served, current rating and poles
as shown on plans.
2.3 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (NON-FUSIBLE):
A. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be
padlockable in "off" position.
B. Unit shall be the heavy-duty version.
C. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock kits.
D. Rating: 600 Volts for all loads served.
E. Make: Square D Class 3110 or acceptable manufacturer in G.E. or
Cutler-Hammer.
2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (FUSIBLE):
A. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be
padlockable in "off" position.
B. Unit shall be the heavy-duty version.
C. Provide motor overload elements and fuse clips for Class R fuses.
D. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock.
E. Rating: 240 Volts for 208 and 240 Volt loads.
600 Volts for loads above 240 volts.
F. Make: Square D Class 3110 or acceptable manufacturer in G.E. or
Cutler-Hammer.
2.5 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS:
A. Motor control switch and Motor overload element in single enclosure.
B. Make Square D class 2510 or acceptable manufacturer in GE or Cutler-
Hammer.
2.6 COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER/FUSIBLE DISCONNECT
SWITCH:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP MOTOR STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 29 10 – PAGE 3 of 3
MARCH 29, 2013
A. Provide motor overload elements and fuse clips for Class R fuses.
B. Visible blade with dual color, red/black position indicator. Unit shall be
padlockable in "off" position.
C. Parts subject to wear or arching shall be removable and replaceable.
D. Where shown provide auxiliary interlock kits.
E. Provide 24 or 120 volt control transformer as shown and 24 or 120 volt
contactor coil, provide fuses for transformer.
F. Provide cover mounted HOA switch.
G. Make: Square D Class 8538 or acceptable manufacturer in GE or Cutler-
Hammer.
2.7 FUSES:
A. Dual Element, time delay.
B. Type and size as required.
C. Make: Buss Fustron, Shawmut Gould, or Brush Reliance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Mount Manual Motor Starters, Magnetic Motor Starters and Disconnects
on substantial mount frames provided by the Electrical Contractor, with
clearances according to the NEC.
B. Circuit according to the NEC.
END SECTION 26 29 10
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 1 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section.
B. The Work of Section 26 01 01 - Electrical Basic Materials and Methods
applies to the Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Provide a complete, operating, tested, functioning, documented lighting
system including all Work shown, specified, or required for proper system
operation.
B. Provide lighting fixtures, lenses, globes, hangers, supports, lamps and
appurtenances to provide a complete lighting system.
C. Provide emergency light battery units, and accessories where shown.
D. Relocate fixtures where shown.
E. Refer to Electrical New Work Drawings and E4 Drawing Schedules,
typical.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Provide product data for each luminaire assembly to be provided and all
light switched, as called or.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.1 GENERAL:
A. All fixtures of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.
B. All lamps of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. Lamps
shall be appropriate for the actual ballast furnished and shall be tested
and certified for operation by the ballast manufacturer.
2.2 FIXTURES:
A. Schedule (See E4 Drawings).
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 2 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS:
A. All fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type and color temperature
as scheduled.
B. Lamps shall be low mercury type.
2.4 BALLASTS:
A. All ballasts shall be of the PCB free type.
B. All ballasts shall be of the energy saving type, as scheduled, 56 watts
input typ. 2-lamp T8.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIXTURES:
A. Securely support all fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and U.L. or ETL listing information.
B. Location:
1. Evenly proportioned in room, except adjusted to conform with
ceiling pattern as described below and except where otherwise
shown or dimensioned.
2. Edges of fixtures parallel with walls.
C. Plaster frames:
1. Provide for all recessed fixtures in wet type ceilings.
2. Install in cooperation with other trades.
D. Mounting:
1. All fixtures must hang true to vertical, free from finger marks,
flaws, scratches, dents or other imperfections.
2. Take care when hanging fixtures not to deface in any way, ceilings
or walls.
3. Install continuous rows of fixtures in straight line; all fixtures at
same level. Fixtures must not be rotated about longitudinal axis
with respect to one another.
4. Mount surface fixtures tight to surface without distorting it.
5. Provide proper mounting equipment and trim for recessed fixtures
to adapt them to the ceiling or wall construction and to prevent
light leaks around trim.
6. Provide special means for supporting fixtures as hereinafter
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 3 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
specified, as shown on plans, or as required.
7. All stem mounted fixtures shall be hung level from self-aligning
hangers in canopies; all stems shall be constructed of formed and
stamped sheet metal, no cast or "pot metal" parts shall be
accepted.
8. Securely support all ceiling fixtures, hangers, and outlet boxes
from structural members, not from ceiling members. In addition
the fixtures shall be securely fastened to framing members of the
ceiling in order to meet NEC, Article 410-16B. Lock clip,
wirelashing or leveling supports shall be acceptable means.
9. Plastic inserts not permitted.
10. Outlet boxes shall not be supported by conduit.
11. Supports for each fixture shall be capable of supporting 4 times
fixture weight. Use 1/4 inch threaded rod, fender washer, and
double nuts.
12. Exterior fixtures shall be installed with non-ferrous metal screws
finished to match the fixture.
13. Fixtures shall be supported from building structure and using
supports as follows (minimum requirements):
a. Ceiling surface mounted:
1) 1’ x 4’ - two supports.
2) 1’ x 8’ - three supports.
3) 2 ‘x 4’ - two supports.
4) 4’ x 4’ - four supports.
14. Provide special extra wide toggle bolt support, 10” wide toggle,
Paine Company #400, mounted above existing plaster ceilings
where approved by Engineer and noted on Plans.
E. Mechanical coordination:
1. Coordinate location of all hangers in rooms without ceilings with
ductwork, plumbing piping, sprinkler piping, etc.
2. Make all necessary offsets and extensions so that stems and
fixtures avoid beams, pipes, ducts, etc.
3. Where fixtures are located below heating, ventilation and air
conditioning units, or ductwork and piping, provide trapeze
hangers around obstruction and suspend fixture from trapeze
hanger. Do not suspend from duct.
F. Architectural coordination:
1. Locate all hangers at intersections of joints or at centers of blocks
in rooms with acoustical tile or other patterned type of ceiling
materials.
2. Space continuous row fixtures to conform to corresponding joint
intersections.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 4 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Coordinate all ceiling layouts and obtain Engineer's approval
before proceeding.
4. Heights of fixtures not scheduled will be furnished on application
to Engineer.
5. Contractor is specifically required to verify ceiling construction and
report in writing any discrepancies between the ceiling type and
the fixture type before releasing fixtures for manufacture.
G. Care of fixtures:
1. Remove, and replace with new, all broken glassware, plastic or
fixtures damaged before final acceptance at no additional expense
to Owner.
2. No allowance made for breakage or theft before final acceptance.
3. Immediately prior to occupancy, damp-clean all diffusers,
glassware, fixture trims, reflectors, lamps, and replace burned-out
lamps.
H. Wiring:
1. Fixture shall not be used as a raceway except as allowed in NEC,
Article 410-31.
2. Wiring to fixture shall be 90° Centigrade minimum.
3.2 LAMPS:
A. All lamps for new fixtures shall be installed new. Provide spare lamps as
required to allow replacement of flickering or bad lamps. Provide labor
and material to replace any failed lamp during the one (1) year warrantee
period. In the event that more than 10% of the lamps in a particular room
or lot fail within twelve (12) months of Project completion or earlier, the
Contractor shall replace all lamps which were provided for that room or
lot. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for this work at no
cost to the Owner, and shall compensate the Owner for his personnel
who provide access for the Contractor.
B. Clean all fixtures and lamps prior to requesting punch list.
3.3 BALLASTS:
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. Provide labor and
material to replace any failed ballast during one (1) year warranty period.
In the event that more than 10% of the ballasts in any particular room, lot
or type of fixture fail within twelve (12) months of Project completion or
earlier, the Contractor shall replace all ballasts which were provided for
that room or lot or type of fixture. The Contractor shall provide all labor
and materials for this work at no cost to the Owner, and shall compensate
the Owner for his personnel who provide access for the Contractor.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP LIGHTING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 51 00 – PAGE 5 of 5
MARCH 29, 2013
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 1 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 266000 - FIRE ALARM IMPROVEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The Contract Drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract,
including the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,
Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections apply to the work of this Division.
B. The Work of the Sections 26 01 00 - Electrical Basic Materials and
Methods apply to the Work of this Section.
1.2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLER REQUIREMENTS:
A. The installation of major fire alarm system renovations and new fire alarm
and detection systems shall be performed by a qualified individual
certified as either a National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies (NICET) Fire Alarm Systems Level III (minimum), or as a
Licensed Professional Engineer.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED:
The work of this Section shall include providing all materials, labor, services,
permits and related work to furnish a complete, operating, tested, functioning,
documented Fire Alarm improvements and modifications and additions to
existing fire alarm System for Cornell University including all work shown,
specified or required for proper system operation including but not limited to the
following:
A. Field verifications of existing conditions and associated demolition and
removal of existing circuits, devices, and fixtures, where shown, removal
of all debris from site and proper disposal of same.
B. Confirmation that the existing system can support new device(s) Provide
new hardware and appropriate and compatible system detection devices
throughout the building as shown on the AMEP electrical drawings.
C. Provide and install new conduit pathways and boxes for new fire alarm
circuiting as shown on drawings. Extend existing fire alarm initiating
circuit to new smoke detector.
D. Provide equipment and conductor identification. All new fire alarm
equipment shall match existing fire alarm manufacturer within the
building.
E. Provide testing of equipment and conductors.
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 2 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
F. Provide openings in existing and new construction as required for the
work of this division.
G. Provide maintenance of system in good condition until final acceptance.
H. Provide Submittals, Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
I. Provide As-Built (Record Drawings) for the following:
1. Fire Alarm System Equipment and Devices
J. Provide Reprogramming (with designators approved by Owner), testing,
and modification to existing fire alarm panel(s).
K. Provide startup, testing and troubleshooting services as required.
L. Provide one year warranty from date of final acceptance.
M. Provide owner training.
N. Provide O&M document submission and “As-Built” Drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. To ensure compliance with the intent of this standard, all new fire alarm
and detection system final designs and associated contract submittals
shall be reviewed by CU Facilities Engineering (FE) and Environmental
Health & Safety (EH&S).
B. One (1) copy of each new project fire alarm system submittal shall be
sent to both the CU FE Electrical Section and EH&S for review and
comment prior to releasing final approved submittals to the contractor.
Submittals shall contain the following information:
1. Product information for all installed components;
2. System riser diagram with typical equipment and device
connection and labeling; NOTE that a detailed system/device
connection diagram is NOT required until the completion of the
project (as a complete “As-Built”).
3. Wire color coding table and/or schedule;
4. System battery stand-by calculations;
5. Special system requirements;
6. System labeling materials and methods as described in this
section.
C. At completion of the project, Contractor shall provide a complete set of
fire alarm “As-Built” drawings that includes the following information prior
to the closeout of the project:
1. New Initiating device locations;
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 3 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Special systems interface locations;
3. Complete fire alarm riser diagram that depicts wiring between
FACP and all new fire alarm system components. Such detail
shall include all major equipment and their locations (approved
room number designation), zone/loop wiring connections to
initiating devices, SNAC wiring to notification appliances, and
interconnections to other special systems as designed per this
standard.
4. Circuit breaker locations for all fire alarm panels and accessory
panels that receive building power. Locations shall include room
number in which the power panel is located, as well as the
breaker number that serves the equipment.
D. The Owner or his designated representative shall approve all equipment
submittals.
E. Administrative Requirements
a) Provide product data for each type of smoke/heat detector
planned for use, at a minimum.
F. General Requirements:
1. Manufacturer's original catalog data and descriptive information
shall be supplied for all major components of the equipment to be
supplied.
2. Suppliers' qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in
business, service policies, warranty definitions, and a list of similar
installations.
3. Contractor qualifications shall be supplied indicating years in
business and prior experience with installations that include the
type of equipment that is to be supplied.
4. All pertinent information shall be supplied regarding the reliability
and operation of the equipment to be supplied.
5. Delivery dates of the equipment to be supplied shall be furnished.
6. Installation and final test/acceptance dates of the equipment shall
be supplied.
7. Sufficient information shall be supplied so that the exact function
of each installed device is known.
8. Provide battery stand-by calculations showing total stand-by
power needed to meet the system requirements as specified.
G. Other than Specified Equipment:
Equipment other than specified shall be considered for approval provided
the following is submitted in writing by the Electrical Contractor to the
Engineer ten (10) days before the bid date:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 4 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Complete lists, descriptions and drawings of materials to be used.
2. A complete list of current drain requirements during normal
supervisory conditions, trouble conditions and alarm conditions.
3. Battery stand-by calculations showing total stand-by power
needed to meet the system requirements as specified.
H. Substituted Equipment:
If equipment other than that specified is supplied, it shall be the
Contractor's obligation to submit the appropriate documentation and all
the Engineer sufficient time to consider the equality of the substituted
items.
I. Satisfying the Entire Intent of these Specifications:
1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to meet the entire intent of
these Specifications. Deviations from the specified items shall be
at the risk of the Contractor
2. All costs for removal, relocation, or replacement of a substituted
item shall be at the risk of the Contractor.
1.5 AGENCY APPROVALS:
A. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or
approved by Factory Mutual or as accepted by the authority having
jurisdiction.
B. The modified fire alarm system in its entirety shall be in compliance with
all applicable fire and electrical codes and comply with the requirements
of the local authority having jurisdiction over said systems.
C. Accessory components as required shall be catalogued by the
manufacturer and U.L. listed to operate with the manufacture’s control
pane.
1.6 SPECIFIC U.L. PROVISIONS:
A. The system shall comply with the applicable provisions of the following
U.L. Standards and Classifications:
1. #864, Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
2. UOJZ, Control Units, System.
3. UOXX, Control Unit Accessories, System.
1.7 SPECIFIC NFPA STANDARDS:
A. The system shall comply with the applicable provision of the following
current National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards:
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 5 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
1. NFPA 71
2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
3. NFPA 90 A
4. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS:
A. The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall comply with all local and state
codes with no exception.
B. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall be a licensed New York State Fire Alarm
and Detection System Installer.
1.9 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS:
A. The Contractor providing modifications to the fire alarm and detection
system shall be licensed per Article 6 D of the New York State General
Business Law.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT MATERIAL AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All
components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All
equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other facilities covered by
this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation
specifications shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be
provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipment provided
under this Specification is provided by different manufactures, then that
equipment shall be recognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and
"Listed" as such by Underwriters’ Laboratories.
B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer’s
representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion.
The manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for an on-site
demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training as
required by the Consulting Engineer.
C. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each
intelligent device.
2.2 SMOKE DETECTOR-PHOTOELECTRIC:
A. Smoke Detectors – Spot Type
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 6 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Smoke detectors shall be of the low profile, solid state,
photoelectric or ionization type and shall be compatible for use in
addressable, zoned, and combination addressable and zoned
systems.
2. Smoke detectors shall be compatible for use in Style D (Class A)
and Style B (Class B) circuits. (Note: Special power supplies or
compensating devices shall not be required for smoke detectors to
properly operate in circuits containing other Style D and Style B
initiating devices. Also, Style B (Class B) smoke detectors shall
not be used in initiating circuits unless provided with a separate 24
VDC control power supply.)
2.3 MOUNTING BASE-STANDARD DETECTOR:
A. Standard detector mounting base suitable for mounting on 4" octagon
and 4" square box or wiremold surface ceiling box. Base shall contain no
electronics, support all detector types and have following minimum
requirements:
1. Removal of respective detector shall not affect communications
with other detectors.
2. Terminal connections shall be made on room side of the base.
Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals
shall not be accepted.
B. Design Make (typical): Simplex Grinnell TrueAlert # 4098-9xxx Series, 2
or 4-wire to match existing system, or as directed (field verify).
C. Design Make (typical): EST Model SIGA-SB, or as directed to match
existing (field verify).
2.4 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION / LABELING
A. Initiating, notification, signaling, and other fire alarm system wiring,
circuits, and conductors shall be color coded and identified by number at
termination points (i.e., control panels, remote annunciators, etc.) and
splice points (i.e., junction boxes, splice boxes, etc.). Wiring shall be
consistent throughout the system with no color changes on individual
loops from the FACP.
B. Junction and splice boxes containing fire alarm system wiring, circuits,
and conductors shall have red covers and marked “FIRE ALARM” in 3/4"
(three-quarter inch) white letters.
C. Fire alarm equipment supplied with 120 VAC power shall be labeled with
the panel source information, including panel name, room number and
source breaker number.
D. End-of-line resistors in two-wire systems shall be located at the fire alarm
control panel, if feasible; otherwise, end-of-line resistors shall be installed
in designated junction boxes with red covers and marked in accordance
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 7 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
with the specifications of this section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Any drilling/work that may create a nuisance fire alarm shall be scheduled
at least 24 hours in advance with Cornell customer service for a fire
protection system shutdown. Shutdown will be performed by Cornell
EH&S staff. Contractor shall not disable any fire protection equipment
without EH&S approval/assistance.
B. Prior to construction within any room containing an existing smoke
detector, coordinate with system vendor to temporarily replace the smoke
detector with a heat detector, and test/re-program the system as required.
Schedule the vendor in advance to avoid project delays. At completion of
room construction, coordinate with vendor to replace heat detector with
smoke detector, and test/re-program the system as required, in the
presence of Cornell EH&S / IFD.
C. Conform to Division 26 Specifications for installation and execution of
work.
3.2 WIRING:
A. For fire alarm use, wire and cable shall be U.L. listed and a minimum of
18 AWG as required by local codes and authority having jurisdiction.
Provide twisted/shielded wire for communication circuits. All fire alarm
and detection circuits shall be in conduit.
B. Raceways containing conductors identified as "Fire Protective Alarm
System". Conductors shall not contain any other conductors and no AC
current carrying conductors shall be allowed in the same raceway with the
D.C. Fire alarm detection and signaling conductors.
3.3 INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITIES:
A. The installer shall field verify existing conditions/systems and coordinate
the installation of the fire alarm equipment with the manufacturer or his
authorized distributor.
B. All conductors and wiring shall be installed according to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. It shall be the installer's responsibility to coordinate with the supplier,
regarding the correct wiring procedures before installing any conduits or
conductors.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS:
A. System components shall be installed in accordance with the latest
BEARDSLEY DESIGN ASSOCIATES
CORNELL – NCP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 26 60 00 – PAGE 8 of 8
MARCH 29, 2013
revisions of the appropriate NFPA pamphlets, the requirements contained
herein, National Electrical Code, local and state regulations, the
requirements of the fire department, and other applicable authorities have
jurisdiction.
B. Low energy U.L. listed fire protective signaling circuit cable with 105° C
insulation may be used when allowed by the local authority having
jurisdiction, however, all conductors shall be in conduit.
C. Installer shall verify that smoke detectors are mounted not less than three
(3) feet from air supply diffusers.
3.5 GUARANTEE AND FINAL TEST:
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from
inherent mechanical and electrical defects for one year (365 days)
from the date of final acceptance.
B. Final Test: Before the installation shall be considered completed and
acceptable by the Owner, a test on the system shall be performed as
follows:
1. The Contractor's job foreman, in the presence of a representative
of the manufacturer, a representative from Cornell EH&S, and the
fire department shall operate each new building fire alarm device
to ensure proper operation of the device, and correct annunciation
at the control panel, the remote annunciator and building alarms.
2. One half of all tests shall be performed on battery stand-by power.
3. When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of both
the Contractor's job foreman and the representatives of the
manufacturer and Owner, a notarized letter co-signed by each
attesting to the satisfactory completion of said testing shall be
forwarded to the Engineer and the fire department.
4. The Contractor shall leave the fire alarm system in proper working
order, and without additional expense to the Owner, shall replace
any defective materials or equipment provided by him under this
Contract, within one year (365 days) from the date of final
acceptance by the Owner.
5. Prior to final test the fire department must be notified in
accordance with local requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 60 00
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 1 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 27 05 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL/COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all General
Conditions, Division 1 Specification Sections, and Instructions to Bidders
apply to this section.
B. Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition applies, in its entirety, to this
Division. It relates to demolition of abandoned voice and data cable plant,
station cabling, backbone copper cables, backbone optical fiber cabling,
terminal blocks, terminal enclosures, splice cases, plywood backboards,
raceways, boxes etc. It relates to removal of all active cable plant that will
be replaced, decommissioned and removed under this contract. It also
relates to general disposal, recycling and materials to be salvaged, as
called for.
C. Section 09 91 23 Paints and Coatings applies to this Division, as it relates
to touch up or repainting of any finished equipment, raceway, wall surface,
ceiling surfaces, ceiling access panels, etc. that is opened, channeled or
damaged during construction as it applies to the item being brought to “as
new” condition.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Include in bid all labor, allowances, materials, tools, plant, transportation,
training, equipment, insurance, temporary protection, permits, demolition,
disposal, permits and fees, taxes and all necessary and related items
required to provide complete and operational systems shown and
described.
B. The contractor shall provide with their bid a complete breakdown of
materials and unit pricing for all products included in their bid.
C. Include in bid all labor, allowances, transportation, sorting and separation
of recycled materials, disposal, insurance, protection of furniture and
furnishings, permits, fees, utility company fees, taxes and all necessary
and related items.
D. Cornell University requires recycling to the largest extent possible for
items being removed, including but not limited to, all backbone and station
copper cables, termination blocks, termination patch panels, metallic
components such as cable managers, raceways, etc.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 2 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Minimum composition requirements and/or installation methods for the
following materials and work are included in this section:
1. Miscellaneous Supports
2. Access Doors and Panels
3. Fire Stopping
4. Flashing and Sealing
5. Cutting and Patching
6. Fire Stop
7. General cable requirements
8. Removals of abandoned cable and termination equipment
9. University Services
10. Temporary Facilities
11. Cleaning
12. Existing Systems
13. Continuity of Services
14. Submittals
15. Workmanship and Warranty
16. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
17. Record Documents
1.3 SCOPE AND COORDINATION
A. The job foremen for each division of work shall meet and plan the
removals and new installations prior to reviewing with the owner’s
representative. This shall include all requirements for Divisions 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 23, 26,27 and 28 contract requirements. At project start-up,
special attention is required for coordination and sequencing for removal
of existing abandoned and in-use cable to create sufficient spare capacity
in existing pathways for reuse and the logistics of extending new conduit
and pathways to alternate floors to extend existing pathways and relocate
Category 6 cable to alternate floors. Maintain existing voice and data
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 3 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
services at all times as directed. Maintain other systems as called for on
the T2-Series drawings.
B. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall coordinate
exact conduit and penetration requirements, slotting/patching of walls to
install new concealed conduits and backboxes for flush faceplates, conduit
and raceway removals methods, pathway routing and installation
methods, mounting requirements for UTP faceplates, locations of new
access panels, modifications of existing gypsum ceilings for installation of
new access panels, dumpster positioning and fire truck and delivery
access, etc. with the Owner’s Project Manager. Additionally, the
Contractor shall coordinate exact storage, staging, recycling, and disposal
requirements with the Project Manager.
C. The Contractor shall provide the following
1. Removal of abandoned or decommissioned voice, data, horizontal
and backbone cables.
2. Sorting and storage of cabling and metallic components intended
for recycling.
3. Removal of patch panels in select existing racks and cabinets.
4. Removal, relocation, reuse of select ARMM backbone cables and
splicing per Drawing T1-CL copper logical riser diagrams.
5. Removal of existing CIT owned optical fiber risers within buildings,
per Drawing T1-FL fiber logical riser diagrams.
6. Removal of plywood backboards, plywood enclosures, cable
straps, anchors, drive rings, termination blocks, surface raceways,
conduit, and hardware, distribution rings, etc, typically in the old
IDF/BDF closets.
7. Subcontracting of furniture and furnishings movers to allow access
work locations for station cable removals, new horizontal cable
placement and testing, and cutover activities.
8. Dust, dirt and water protection of furniture, walls, floors, carpets,
furnishings from damage, during demolition, new construction and
new cutover provisioning. Dust protection of smoke detectors.
9. Fire stopping and sealing of the insides of existing/new conduits,
existing/new sleeves, holes, wall cavities and raceways for all
cables removed under this contract.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 4 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
10. Patching and painting of floors, walls, soffits and ceilings upon
removal of all exposed wiring in offices, conference rooms, labs,
corridors, chase ways, etc. for cables removed under this contract.
11. Fire stopping and patching of the insides of conduits, sleeves,
raceways and wall cavities for all new vertical and horizontal
pathways installed for new cabling, including all empty or spare
facilities.
12. Modular jacks, machine printed labels, mounting screws, cable
wrap-around labels, etc.
13. Final closing of all raceways, pull boxes, ceiling access panels after
cable testing and repair work is complete.
14. Coordination of deliveries, dumpster/staging logistics and fire lane
access.
15. Coordination of the new grounding riser system by the electrical
contractor. Bonding equipment connections for racks, cable
runways, cable sheaths, lightning protection, cable trays, primary
conduit systems, backbone copper cable sheaths, and all other
metallic components in the TR rooms.
16. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may
be required for reuse of existing pathways (conduits, pullboxes and
recess backboxes, etc) to provide sufficient space to install new
Category 6 cabling while maintaining parallel service as directed by
Owner.
17. Select removal of inactive cabling and faceplates, shutdown
coordination, as may be required for reuse of existing pathways
(conduits, pullboxes and recess backboxes, etc) to provide
sufficient space to install new Category 6 cabling while maintaining
parallel service as directed by Owner.
18. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may
be required, for this building and the adjacent buildings affected by
this work.
19. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may
be required for reuse of existing conduits, cable ladders and IDF
conduit/sleeves, affected by this work.
20. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may
be required, for reuse of any existing conduit stub-ups and
backboxes.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 5 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
21. Temporary service provisioning and shutdown coordination, as may
be required. This will be required for areas where existing raceway
is intended to be reused.
22. Permits, inspections and associated fees.
23. Parking permits, identification badges and all associated fees.
24. Testing, labeling and Documentation of all voice, video, audio and
data cables.
25. Relocation of racks, panels, wall mounted blocks, plywood panels
and existing optical fiber and backbones copper cables to allow for
reconfiguration of the BDF and IDF rooms and provisioning of new
backbone pathways and new backbone cabling in existing IDF
closets.
D. The Contractor shall also provide the following
1. Category 6&6A Cable
2. Category 6&6A modular jacks
3. UTP faceplates
4. UTP faceplates, special waterproof (raintight) and in-use faceplate
covers.
5. UTP Category 6 patch panels
6. Category 6 Permanent Link testing of unpatched links.
7. High pair count ARMM, 24 AWG, telephone riser cables with
corrugated aluminum shield. High pair count cable splicing as
called for in T1-CL riser diagram and section 27 13 00.
8. Innerduct and optical fiber cables and terminations as called for in
T1-FL riser diagram and section 27 13 00.Optical fiber rack mount
patch panels as indicated on the T3 drawings
9. Field installable optical connectors, bulkhead adapter packs
10. 19” Equipment Racks as indicated on the T3 drawings, for
Telecommunication Rooms.
11. Cable Runways for Telecommunication rooms, as indicated on the
T3 drawings.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 6 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
12. 110 Voice termination blocks for riser cables and rack interconnect
cables as indicated on the T3 drawings
13. Distribution rings and 188B brackets as indicated on the T3
drawings
14. Vertical and Horizontal Cable Managers for new
Telecommunication rooms, as indicated on the T3 drawings
15. Misc. hardware, screws, anchors, straps, beam clamps, all-thread,
nuts, washers, fabrications, etc.
16. Hook and Loop wraps for UTP cables support and dressing in TRs
and inside of cable trays and large raceways.
17. Ty-wraps (where permitted, such as backbone copper cable binder
groups, splice cases, etc.).
18. Firestop, fire stop pillows and patching compounds
19. Patching and painting as required, by an approved subcontractor.
20. Machine printed labels for faceplates, racks, cabinets, cables, etc.
21. Bonding, strapping, wire, cable, lugs and screws as indicated on
the T3 drawings
22. Adapter brackets, radius fittings and mounting hardware for
raceways, cable trays, cable runways, power poles, and modular
furniture as required.
23. Permits and inspection applications and related fees.
24. Cleaning and polishing consumables for optical fibers.
25. Jet-line, pull-line, pull rope, winch rope, and measuring tape for
wall-to-wall backbone conduit measurements.
26. Cable lubricants and cleaners
27. Splicing connectors, shield bond connectors, vinyl/rubber/friction
tapes, encapsulant gels, grounding braid, d-Gel cleaners, test
equipment and testing adapters, etc. for copper backbone cable
splicing and termination, and testing.
28. Shield bond connectors, vinyl/rubber/friction tapes, encapsulant
gels, break-out kits, furcation tubing, grounding braid, alcohol
wipes, compressed air, polishing paper/pucks, d-Gell cleaners,
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 7 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
testing patch cords and adapters required for testing, etc for fiber
backbone cable preparation and termination and testing.
29. Daily cleaning of TR Rooms and office and labs as called for.
30. Coordination of work and compliance with safety requirements for
laboratories, animal facilities, bio-safety spaces, animal hospital
operating rooms, and confined space per EH&S and OSHA
standards.
1.4 REGULATIONS AND CODE COMPLIANCE
A. All work and materials shall conform to and be installed, inspected and
tested in accordance with the governing rules and regulations of federal,
state and local governmental agencies.
B. Reference to regulations, codes and standards means the latest edition,
amendment and revisions to the regulations, codes and standards in
effect on the date of the Contract Documents.
C. The following is a list of codes and standards that will apply to this project.
1. New York State Building Code.
2. New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code.
3. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations.
4. New York State Department of Health.
5. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration - OSHA.
6. National Life Safety Code, NFPA 101.
7. National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
8. Local Codes and Ordinances for the City and or Town of Ithaca.
9. NEMA Standards
10. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
11. Factory Mutual and/or Owner’s Insurance Carrier
12. International Standards Organization (ISO)
13. New York State Education Department - “Manual of Planning
Standards”
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 8 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
14. ANSI/TIA/EIA - Building Telecommunications Standards
15. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
16. National Electrical Contractor Association Standards
17. National Electrical Installation Standards (NECA-NEIS)
18. Cable Tray Institute
19. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Standards
20. Federal Communications Commission
21. IEEE Standards, including C-2 – National Electrical Safety Code
22. Internet Engineering Task Force RFCs
23. Federal Communications Commission
24. Cornell University Design and Construction Standards, Current
Edition.
25. Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety Standards.
26. NYS Public Service Commission
27. American with Disabilities Act
1.5 GLOSSARY
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
AIA American Institute of Architects
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
BDF Building Distribution Frame
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Services International
CIT Cornell’s Information Technologies Department
COAM CIT Owned and Maintained Equipment
DOAM Department Owned and Maintained Equipment
CU Cornell University
EHS Cornell’s Environmental Health and Safety
Department
EIA Electronic Industries Association
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 9 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
ELFEXT Equal Level far end cross talk
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FEXT Far end cross talk
FM Factory Mutual Insurance Company
FPC Fire Protection Contractor
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers
ISO International Standards Organization
MDF Main Distribution Frame
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
NECA National Electrical Contractor Association
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NEXT Near end Cross Talk
NYBFU New York board of Fire Underwriters
NYS/DEC New York State Department of Environmental
Conservation
NYS/UFBC New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building
Code
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PBX Private Branch Exchange Telephone Switches
PDC Cornell’s Planning Design and Construction
Department
PSELFEXT Power sum equal level far end cross talk
TGB Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
TR Telecommunications Room
UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization
UL Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
Approved / Approval Written permission to use a material or system.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 10 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
As Called For Materials, equipment including the execution
specified/shown in the contract documents.
Code Requirements Minimum requirements.
Concealed Work installed in pipe and duct shafts, chases or
recesses, inside walls, above ceilings, in slabs or
below grade.
Design Equipment Refer to Article 1.7, BASIS OF DESIGN.
Design Make Refer to Article 1.7, BASIS OF DESIGN.
Equal or Equivalent Equally acceptable as determined by Owner’s
Representative.
Exposed Work not identified as concealed.
Final Acceptance Owner acceptance of the project from Contractor
upon certified by Owner’s Representative.
Furnish Supply and deliver to installation location.
Furnished by Others Receive delivery at job site or where called for and
install.
Inspection Visual observations by Owner’s site Representative.
Install Mount and connect equipment and associated
materials ready for use.
Labeled Refers to classification by a standards agency.
Make Refer to Article 1.7, BASIS OF DESIGN.
Or Approved Equal Approved equal or equivalent as determined by
Owner’s Representative.
Owner’s representative Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with
the Owner for professional services.
Prime Professional Architect or Engineer having a contract directly with
the Owner for professional services.
Provide Furnish, install and connect ready for use.
Relocate Disassemble, disconnect, and transport equipment to
new locations, then clean, test, and install ready for
use.
Replace Remove and provide new item.
Review A general contractual conformance check of specified
products.
Roughing Pipe, duct, conduit, equipment layout and installation.
Satisfactory As specified in contract documents.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 11 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
Refer to Division 1 sections for further definitions.
1.7 BASIS OF DESIGN
A. The contract documents are prepared on basis of one manufacturer as
"design make," even though other manufacturers' names are listed as
acceptable makes. If Contractor elects to use one of the listed makes
other than "design equipment," submit detailed drawings, showing that the
proposed equipment from an acceptable manufacturer meets or exceeds
the specifications of the design make. Show maintenance clearances,
differing dimensions, service removal space required, and other pertinent
revisions to the design arrangement. Make required changes in the work
of other trades, at no increase in any contract. Assume responsibility for
proper location of roughing and connections by other trades. If revised
arrangement submittal is rejected, revise and resubmit specified "design
equipment" item which conforms to contract documents.
1.8 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A. The drawings are diagrammatic, unless detailed dimensioned drawings
are included. Drawings show approximate locations of equipment, racks,
patch panels, cable managers, backboards, cabinets, wiring devices, pull
boxes, conduits, core bores, cable trays, cable tray radius and floor
penetrations, outlet locations, and fixtures. Exact locations are subject to
the approval of the Owner's Representative.
B. The general run of conduits, raceways, cable trays, ladder racks,
backbone and horizontal pathways, underground utilities, and vertical and
horizontal sleeves, indicated on the drawings, is not intended to be the
exact routing. Conduit, outlet and cable designations and logical drawings,
in the form of "Home Runs", indicate the designation of run, the size,
general route and the quantity of cables and conductors, and the TR and
BDF equipment rooms from which the homerun is served. Coordinate all
horizontal and vertical pathway layout work with that of other trades and
confirm cabling distance limitations for horizontal and backbone cabling
will be adhered to. Coordinate all horizontal and vertical pathway layout
work with that of other trades and confirm cabling bend radius and
maximum pulling tension limitations will be adhered to, especially at all
proposed junction box and pull box locations.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers of equipment shall be firms regularly and currently engaged
in the production of equipment and accessories provided. Unless
otherwise noted the equipment provided for this project needs to have
been in satisfactory and efficient operation on at least three (3)
installations for not less than three (1) year.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 12 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Suppliers of equipment must have factory trained and authorized
personnel for the service of all equipment provided.
C. Apply and install materials, equipment, and specialties in accordance with
manufacturer’s written instructions. Conflicts between the manufacturer’s
instructions and the contract documents shall be referred to the Owner’s
Representative for resolution.
D. The contractors installers shall have been regularly engaged in the
installation, termination and testing of the all equipment, cabling and
devices called for in this contract for a minimum of (5) five years.
E. The contractor shall engage the services of a qualified installer for the
installation of access panels and cutting and patching work.
F. The prime contractor is responsible for employing qualified sub-
contractors to complete work where the quality assurance requirements
cannot be met by the prime contractor’s full time employees. All
subcontractors must be approved by the Owner.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor’s qualifications and references
B. Panduit P.S.C. certification
C. Corning Cable Systems N.P.I. certification
D. Complete breakdown of materials and unit pricing for all products included
in their bid
E. Signed Warranty. Also see 3.1 of this section
F. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide Materials That Meet the Following Minimum Requirements:
1. Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a
smoke developed rating of 50 or less, in accordance with NFPA
255.
2. All equipment and material for which there is a listing service shall
bear a UL label.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 13 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Electrical equipment and systems shall meet UL Standards and
requirements of the N.E.C. This listing requirement applies to the
entire assembly. Any modifications to equipment to suit the intent of
the specifications shall be performed in accordance with these
requirements.
4. Equipment shall meet all applicable FCC Regulations
5. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new and be the
standard products of the manufacturer. Used equipment or
damaged material will be rejected.
6. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not indicate
acceptance of a standard or catalogued item of equipment. All
equipment and systems must conform to the Specifications and
meet the quality of the design make.
7. Materials used in this contract shall meet the N.Y.S. Fire, Gas and
Toxicity Requirements and be listed in the directory of approved
products filed under Article 15 Part 1120 of the New York State Fire
Prevention and Building Code for use in New York State.
2.2 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS
A. Provide maximum standardization of components to reduce spare part
requirements, including custom entrance end fittings and custom cable
tray components.
B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies which include components made
by others shall assume complete responsibility for final assembled unit.
1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same
manufacturer.
2. Constituent parts which are alike shall be product of a single
manufacturer.
3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total
assembly for intended service.
4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of
components, and shall repair or replace elements of the assemblies
as required to deliver specified performance of the complete
assembly.
C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name or trademark,
model number and serial number on a name plate securely affixed in a
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 14 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
conspicuous place, or cast integral with, stamped or otherwise
permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.
D. Major items of equipment which serve the same function must be the
same make and model. Exception will be permitted if performance
requirements cannot be met.
2.3 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with
other items being furnished and with existing items so that a complete and
fully operational system will result.
2.4 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. If any part of equipment requires a special tool for assembly, adjustment
or maintenance thereof and such tool is not readily available on
commercial tool market, it shall be furnished by the Contractor. At the end
of the project, contactor shall turn over two such tools to owner for their
use in future operations and maintenance.
2.5 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS
A. Provide equipment with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to
be lifted in its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any
handling conditions which might be encountered without bending or
distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORTS
A. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association Metal bars, plates,
tubing, etc. shall conform ASTM standards:
1. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and grating - ASTM A 36
2. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing - ASTM A 500
3. Hot - Rolled Steel Tubing - ASTM A 501
4. Steel Pipe - ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded
B. Metal Fasteners shall be Zinc-coated (type, grade and class as required)
2.7 GENERAL CABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. Interior Backbone optical fiber cables included in this project, passing
through two or more floors shall be suitable, listed and marked for use in a
riser application. Optical backbone cable shall minimally be OFNR rated
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 15 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
per the Current National Electric Code and shall meet all local and state
codes.
B. All Category 3 voice backbone cables, Category 6 & 6A horizontal cables
shall be minimally CMR riser-rated per the Current National Electric Code
and shall meet all local and state codes.
C. Interior copper backbone cables shall be twisted 24 AWG, contain a
corrugated aluminum shield and minimally be CMR rated.
2.8 FIRE STOPPING
A. Fire-stopping for Openings through Fire and Smoke Rated Walls and
Floor Assemblies shall be listed or classified by an approved independent
testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop Systems." The
system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of Through-Penetration
Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
B. Fire stopping materials used on the inside of communications conduit,
sleeve and cable tray penetrations through rated assemblies shall be
suitable for future reentry. Reenterable putty and pillows are the preferred
type products for all communication cabling installations. Curable foam
sealants and caulks are not acceptable for inside sleeves and conduits for
any communication cable plant installations.
C. Shall be UL approved products.
D. Shall conform to Section 07 84 13.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP AND WARRANTY
A. Workmanship shall meet or exceed industry standards and be fully
guaranteed for one full year from final acceptance.
B. A factory registered Panduit (PSC) and Corning Cable Systems (NPI)
contractor shall complete the cable installation. The contractor shall have
completed standards based product and installation training. A copy of the
factory registrations shall be submitted with the proposal.
C. The copper systems cabling and connectivity systems warranty shall be a
Panduit Certification Plus System Warranty to guarantee total end-to-end
high performance that meets application requirements. The guarantee
shall include cable and connectivity components and have one point of
contact for all cabling system issues. The copper cabling/connectivity
system shall be warranted for a period of at least 15 years.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 16 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
D. The optical fiber systems cabling and connectivity systems warranty shall
be a Corning Cable Systems LANscape Network of Preferred Installers
warranty to guarantee total end-to-end high performance that meets
application requirements. The guarantee shall include cable and
connectivity components and have one point of contact for all cabling
system issues. The optical fiber system shall be warranted for a period of
at least 15 years.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make good, without expense
to the Owner, any and all defects arising during the warranty period that
are due to imperfect materials, appliances, improper installation or poor
workmanship.
F. Cable integrity and associated terminations shall be thoroughly inspected ,
fully tested and guaranteed as free from defects, transpositions, opens-
shorts, tight kinks, damaged jacket insulation etc.
3.2 EXISTING SYSTEMS AND CONDITIONS
A. Inspect the entire work area for defects in the existing construction such
as scratches, holes, damaged wall surfaces, damaged ceiling tiles,
damaged furniture, etc. Submit a complete list and photographs of existing
damage, to the owner prior to beginning work. If existing damage is not
documented the contractor shall repair all damage to like new condition,
that is determined to have been caused by the work in this contract.
B. The job foremen for each division of work shall meet and plan the
removals and new installations prior to reviewing with the owner’s
representative. This shall include all requirements for Divisions 0, 1, 23, 26
and 27 contract requirements. At project start-up, special attention is
required for coordination and sequencing for removal of existing exposed
cable trough in corridors, maintain existing services, coordination of new
cable tray installation requirements with regard to existing fire alarm
annunciation, eye wash stations, emergency showers, door hold open
devices etc.
C. Before construction work commences, the Contractor shall coordinate
exact conduit and penetration requirements, millwork and cabinetry
modifications, conduit and raceway removals methods, pathway routing
and installation methods, cable tray mounting routing and installation
means and methods requirements for UTP faceplates, locations of new
access panels, dumpster positioning and fire truck and delivery access,
removal of raceways in advance of active cabling decommissioning,
temporary service provisions for any planned reuse of existing conduit
stub-ups and recessed backboxes, reuse of existing utility
columns/chases in laboratories, etc. with the CIT Project Manager.
Additionally, the Contractor shall coordinate exact storage, staging,
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 17 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
deliveries, use of freight or passenger elevators, recycling, and disposal
requirements with the CIT Project Manager.
3.3 ROUGH-IN
A. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings, changes in elevation, etc. Verify final locations for rough-ins with
field measurements and with the equipment being connected. Verify exact
location and elevations at work site prior to any rough in work. DO NOT
SCALE PLANS. If field conditions, details, changes in equipment or shop
drawing information require a significant change to the original documents,
contact the owners representative for approval before proceeding.
B. All equipment locations shall be coordinated with other trades and existing
conditions to eliminate interference with required clearances for equipment
maintenance and inspections.
1. Where more than one trade is involved the construction of a
Telecommunication Room (TR), all shall cooperate and install their
own work to utilize the space equally between them in proportion to
their individual requirements and as prioritized below. Refer to the
T3 drawings for planning Telecommunication Room rough-in and
plan and coordinate with all other trades accordingly. MOCK-UP
RACKS, CABLE RUNWAYS AND MAJOR PATHWAYS ENTRY
POINTS AS DIRECTED BY CIT PROJECT MANAGER, BEFORE
ROUGH-IN OF ALL OTHER UTILITIES AND REVIEW WITH
OWNER FOR APPROVAL TO PROCEED. Where possible, the
design intent is to install the cable runways at approximately 8’
A.F.F with 12” of vertical clearance above. In general, 19” rack
placement and cable runways shall be given ultimate placement
preference, followed by backbone pathways and major raceways
entering the TR from the corridor and floors above/below, followed
by wiring and communications, followed by luminaries and lastly
followed by mechanical equipment, mechanical piping and HVAC
ductwork If, after installation of any equipment, piping, ducts,
conduit, and boxes, it is determined that ample vertical clearance
over the cable runways, maintenance and passage space has not
been provided, rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as
required for ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or
location of the material or equipment supplied, which may be
necessary in order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid
conflicts between trades, shall be brought to the immediate
attention of the Owner's Representative and approval received
before such alterations are made. Coordinate work with other
trades and existing conditions and determine exact routing of all
cable tray, hangers, conduit, etc., before fabrication and installation.
Coordinate with Architectural Drawings. Verify with Owner's
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 18 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
Representative exact location and mounting height of all equipment
in finished areas, such as equipment racks, communication and
electrical devices. Coordinate all work with the architectural
reflected ceiling plans and/or existing Architecture.
2. Where horizontal pathways are installed above existing lay in
ceilings, remove a section of tiles the complete length of the
proposed pathway. Document all offsets, bends, box location,
conflicts, obstructions, etc. required for the complete installation.
Reinstall the ceiling tiles after requirements are documented and at
the end of every shift. If there are existing obstacles that prevent
the installation of the raceway in the general location indicated on
contract documents, notify the owners representative immediately.
3. For equipment and connections provided in this contract, prepare
rough-in drawings as follows:
a) Existing equipment being relocated: Measure the existing
equipment and prepare drawings for installation in new
location.
b) New equipment: Obtain equipment roughing drawings and
dimensions, and then prepare rough-in drawings.
4. Where more than one trade is involved in an area, space or chase,
all shall cooperate and install their own work to utilize the space
equally between them in proportion to their individual requirements.
In general, ductwork shall be given preference except where
grading of piping becomes a problem, followed by piping then
electrical wiring and communications. If, after installation of any
equipment, piping, ducts, conduit, and boxes, it is determined that
ample maintenance and passage space has not been provided,
rearrange work and/or furnish other equipment as required for
ample maintenance space. Any changes in the size or location of
the material or equipment supplied, which may be necessary in
order to meet field conditions or in order to avoid conflicts between
trades, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Owner's
Representative and approval received before such alterations are
made.
C. Provide easy, safe, and code mandated clearances at equipment racks
and enclosures, and other equipment requiring maintenance and
operation. Contractor shall relocate existing work in the way of new
construction. VISIT SITE BEFORE BIDDING TO DETERMINE SCOPE
OF WORK.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 19 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all required locations, cutting,
patching, coring and associated work for the complete cabling system at
no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. All cutting, patching and installation of sleeves, conduits and raceways for
cabling work shall be by the Prime Contractor. The Contractor shall
coordinate required penetration, sleeve, conduit raceway and cable tray
locations with all other contractors, prior to the beginning the raceway
work. Close coordination of relocations and penetrations into new TR
rooms is critical to proper build-out and fit-out for desired layout and cable
management of the new TR rooms.
3.5 CONCEALMENT
A. Conceal all contract work above ceilings and in walls, below slabs, in
attics, in chases in soffits, and elsewhere throughout building
3.6 FIRE-STOPPING
A. Fire-stopping for Openings Through Fire and Smoke Rated Wall and Floor
Assemblies:
1. Provide materials and products listed or classified by an approved
independent testing laboratory for "Through-Penetration Fire-Stop
Systems." The system shall meet the requirements of "Fire Tests of
Through-Penetration Fire-Stops" designated ASTM E814.
2. Provide fire-stop system seals at all locations where cables pass
through sleeves in rated partitions and floors.
3. The minimum required fire resistance ratings of the wall or floor
assembly shall be maintained by the fire-stop system. The
installation shall provide an air and watertight seal.
4. The methods used shall incorporate qualities which permit the easy
removal or addition cables without drilling or use of special tools.
The product shall adhere to itself to allow repairs to be made with
the same material and permit the vibration, expansion and/or
contraction of any items passing through the penetration without
cracking, crumbling and resulting reduction in fire rating.
5. Provide the following ratings:
a) Floors - 3 Hours
b) Corridor walls - 1-2 hours
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 20 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
c) Smoke Partitions - 1 hour
3.7 WATERPROOFING
A. The contractor shall seal all foundation penetrating conduits and sleeves
to eliminate the intrusion of moisture and gases into the building.
B. Conduits with cables shall be permanently sealed by firmly packing the
void around the cable with oakum and capping with 2 inches of hydraulic
cement or waterproof duct seal. Obtain advance approval by owner for
use of hydraulic cement to seal inside of underground conduits and ducts
that have been prone to perpetual leakage and flooding.
C. Spare underground conduits shall be plugged with expandable plugs, with
pull-rope ring, to provide a secure and watertight fit and allow the end of
the existing pull lines to be secured at the conduit entrance point.
3.8 SUPPORTS
A. Provide required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces,
and other items to properly support contract work. Supports shall meet the
approval of the Owner's Representative. Modify studs, add studs, add
framing, or otherwise reinforce studs in metal stud walls and partitions as
required to suit contract work. If necessary, in stud walls, provide special
supports from floor to structure above. For precast Panels/Planks and
Metal Decks, support communication work as determined by manufacturer
and Owner's Representative. Provide heavy gauge steel mounting plates
for mounting contract work. Mounting plates shall span two or more studs.
Size, gauge, and strength of mounting plates shall be sufficient for
equipment size, weight, and desired rigidity.
3.9 GENERAL INSTALLATIONS REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to
be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as
they are constructed.
B. Coordinate ordering and installation of all equipment with long lead times
or having a major impact on work by other trades so as not to delay the
job or impact the construction schedule. Pay close attention to equipment
that must be installed prior to building enclosure.
C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems,
materials and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
D. Set all equipment to accurate line and grade, level all equipment and align
all equipment components.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 21 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for
erection and delivery of equipment and apparatus furnished into the
premises. These items shall be removed from premises when no longer
required.
F. No equipment shall be hidden or covered up prior to inspection by the
owners representative. All work that is determined to be unsatisfactory
shall be corrected immediately.
G. All work shall be installed level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to
other building systems and components.
H. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished
surfaces.
3.10 UTILITY COMPANY SERVICES
A. Coordination by CIT.
B. Provide grounding and bonding of copper media as required by the utility
or service provider.
3.11 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SERVICES
A. Cornell provides voice and data, Local Area Network, Fire Alarm
Monitoring, Wide Area Network, local card access, local security systems
etc. connections to all buildings in this project. Maintain all existing
systems through the duration of construction. Coordinate all removals,
shutdowns, service transfers with the Owner’s Representative.
B. Prior to removal or relocation of any Cornell copper backbone cables (25
pair or greater) or any terminal blocks, the contractor shall test all pairs for
presence of dial tone, digital telephone signal, battery, data services,
special service circuits. Any suspect working circuits or any line that can
be identified by telephone number shall be tagged for review by the
Owner’s representative. Provide a list of locations of suspect working
circuits to Owner. For pairs identified as unused in backbone cables (25
pair or greater), the contractor shall provide a soft kill (temporary partial
disconnect) of every pair, whereby either the tip or ring conductor is lifted
(create and open) from the terminal and a tag placed on each terminal
block indicating the date and technician who performed said soft kill. A list
of soft kills shall be maintained at the jobsite for routine inspection by the
Owners representative and for immediate access by repair technician
dispatched with trouble reports. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s
foreman shall contact the Cornell CIT project representative and the CIT
helpdesk 10 minutes prior to performing soft kills so that contact
information can be shared for escalation purposes. If required by the
Owner, the Contractor’s foreman shall post official utility disruption notices
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 22 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
about the building in advance of the soft kill or possible service disruption.
Soft kills shall remain intact for 7 working days before cutting and removal
of each backbone cable. Soft kills shall be performed at least three days
prior to any weekend or holiday so that building occupants have time to
report troubles during normal working hours.
C. Prior to removal or relocation of any Cornell fiber optical cables or
connections the contractor shall meet and plan the working at least 5 days
in advance with the Owner. Provide a list of locations of suspect working
circuits to Owner. Provide a soft kill (temporary partial disconnect) of every
fiber pair, whereby either the transmit or receive path is lifted (create and
open) and a tag placed on each terminal block indicating the date and
technician who performed said soft kill. A list of soft kills shall be
maintained at the jobsite for routine inspection by the Owners
representative and for immediate access by repair technician dispatched
with trouble reports. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s foreman
shall contact the Cornell CIT project representative and the CIT helpdesk
10 minutes prior to performing soft kills so that contact information can be
shared for escalation purposes. If required by the Owner, the Contractor’s
foreman shall post official utility disruption notices about the building in
advance of the soft kill or possible service disruption. Soft kills shall
remain intact for 7 working days before cutting and removal of each
backbone cable. Soft kills shall be performed at least three days prior to
any weekend or holiday so that building occupants have time to report
troubles during normal working hours.
3.12 PAINTING
A. This Contract includes the following:
1. Painting required for touch-up of surfaces damaged due to the
installation of Division 27 work.
2. All finished equipment surfaces damaged during construction shall
be brought to “as new” condition by touch or repainting. Any rust
shall be removed and primed prior to painting.
3. Patch and paint wall and floor penetrations where cabling has been
installed without the use of conduits, sleeves or raceways.
4. Refer to Section 09 91 23-Painting, for additional requirements.
5. Painting as called for on Division 27 Drawings.
3.13 REMOVALS
A. Where existing equipment and cable removals are called for, submit
complete list to Owner's Representative. All items that Owner wishes to
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 23 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
shall be delivered to location directed by Owner. Items that Owner does
not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of or
recycled. Removal and disposal of materials shall be in accordance with
Federal, State and Local law requirements. Where equipment is called for
to be relocated, contractor shall carefully remove, clean and recondition,
then reinstall. Remove all abandoned cabling, wiring, equipment,
supports, straps, anchors, rings, plywood, terminal block and fixtures, etc.
Visit each room, janitor closet, and pipe chase, shaftway, etc. to determine
total Scope of Work.
B. Unless indicated otherwise on the removal drawings, completely remove
all supports, straps, hangers, rings, staples, anchors, rings, tywraps,
plywood, terminal blocks, fixtures, conduit raceways, fastenings to building
structural systems and other devices associated with the equipment not to
be reused in the new work. Seal all openings, after removal of equipment
and cabling in an approved manner and in accordance with plans and
specifications where specifically covered. Structural integrity of the
building system shall be maintained. Reference shall also be made to the
architectural, structural, mechanical, site, and electrical drawings and
specifications for additional facilities to be demolished or handled.
3.14 START UP AND OWNER INSTRUCTIONS
A. Before acceptance of the work, furnish necessary skilled labor to operate
all systems. Instruct the Owners designated personnel on the proper
operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Obtain written
acknowledgment from person instructed prior to acceptance repeat the
instructions if asked to do so. Contractor is fully responsible for systems
until acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless
otherwise agreed in writing. Provide, operating, maintenance and starting
precautions and procedures to be followed by the Owner for operating
systems and equipment. Mount the instruction in clear plastic holder on or
adjacent to the equipment.
B. Where supervision by a manufacturer is called for, provide manufacturer’s
certified technician or engineer to supervise the startup, testing and
adjustment of the equipment or system. Where two or more
manufacturer’s are involved both manufacturer’s shall be present at start
up. The manufacturer shall provide a written report detailing the testing
and start-up including problems that occurred and their method of
resolution.
3.15 CUTOVER
A. The cabling contractor shall have a minimum of two (2) technicians
available for on-site to assist as required with system(s) activation for each
phase of construction. Duration to include a minimum of eight hours.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 00 – PAGE 24 OF 24
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Activities shall include, but will not be limited to:
1. Troubleshooting of installed cable plant
2. Installation of additional cables.
3. Trouble ticket resolution
3.16 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare and provide record documents in accordance with all
requirements of Sections 01 78 39 and this Section.
B. In addition to those requirements provide the following:
1. Document the routing of major backbone conduit systems, location
of pullboxes and junction boxes, location of backbone copper
splices and wall-to-wall measurements of backbone conduit
systems.
2. Document the rack and cabinet elevations of all contract installed
hardware and also include Owner provided electronics and
hardware that has been added to each rack or cabinet in the TR
rooms prior to final acceptance.
3. Document the location of new access panels installed into
permanent ceilings.
END OF SECTION
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 1 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 27 05 28
COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. SCOPE
1. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
a) Interior Horizontal Cabling Communication Pathways
b) Interior Backbone Cabling Communication Pathways
2. Minimum composition requirements and installation methods for the
following pathways:
a) Conduit
b) Innerduct
c) Sleeves
d) Cable tray
e) Cable hangers (J-Hooks)
f) Wireways and wire troughs
g) Floor Boxes
h) Outlet Boxes
3. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete
installation of work called for in the contract documents.
4. Prior to installation and as part of the contract, relocate any device a distance of 6
feet in any direction at the request of the owner at no additional cost. This shall
include all necessary conduit/s, cable, raceways, cutting, painting and patching to
accomplish the modification. Also refer to Division 26 specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All pathways and associated equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in
the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Owner's
Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture
indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed.
Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of
the equipment specified and subject to approval.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 2 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:
1. National Electric Code (NFPA 70) including the following Articles:
a) 318 - Cable Trays
b) 331 - Electrical Nonmetallic tubing
c) 348 - Electrical metallic tubing
d) 349 - Flexible metallic tubing
e) 350 - Flexible metal conduit
f) 351 – Liquid-Tight Flexible metal conduit and Liquid-Tight flexible
nonmetallic conduit.
g) 352A - Surface Metal Raceways
h) 352B - Surface Nonmetallic raceways
i) 353 – Multi-outlet Assembly
j) 354 – Under-floor raceways
k) 362 - Metal Wireways and nonmetallic Wireways
l) 370 - Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Bodies and Fittings
m) 645 - Information Technology Equipment
n) 770 - Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways
o) 800 - Communications Circuits
2. The following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards:
a) ANSI-C80.3 Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-
coated
b) ANISI-C80.2 Specification for rigid steel conduit, enameled
3. The following Telecommunication Industry Association (TIA) standards.
a) ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-C. Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard
b) ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569-B Commercial Building Standard for
Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces
c) EIA/TIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 3 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
d) EIA/TIA-607 –B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
requirements for Telecommunications
4. The following BICSI guidelines
a) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Design Manual (9th edition)
b) BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (2nd edition)
c) BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (2nd edition)
5. The following UL Standards:
a) UL 1, 2000 - Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit
b) UL 3, 1999 - Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing for Electric Wiring
c) UL 5, 1996 - Surface Metal Electrical Raceways and Fittings
d) UL 360, 1996 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical
e) UL 514B, 1996 - Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes.
f) UL 797, 1997 - Electrical Metallic Tubing
g) UL 870, 1995 - Electrical Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated
Fittings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data for the following:
1. Conduit
2. Sleeves
3. Cable tray
4. Cable hangers (J-Hooks)
5. Wireways and wire Troughs
6. Floor Boxes
7. Outlet Boxes
8. Surface raceways
9. Cable tray accessories and specialty fittings, including panel type connectors for
finished ends
10. EACH surface raceway entrance end fitting and each radius elbow / tee per T4
details drawing and this section
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 4 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
11. Label each submittal with a specification section and a T4 drawing detail
reference
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit
1. Shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel, including threads.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
1. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel
2. Acceptable manufactures
a) Triangle
b) Wheatland Tube
c) Allied Tube
d) Steel Duct
e) LTV Steel
C. Flexible Metal Conduit
1. Flexible Metal Conduit shall only be permitted when used in the inside the
wall cavity only.
2. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed of one continuous length of spirally
wound, interlocked, zinc coated strip steel. Interior surface shall be free from
burrs or sharp edges
3. Acceptable manufacturers
a) Anaconda
b) American Flexible Conduit Co.
c) O-Z/Gedney
d) Thomas and Betts
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
1. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be constructed of one continuous length of spirally
wound, interlocking zinc coated strip steel. Interior surfaces shall be free from
burrs and sharp edges. Provide with a liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl
chloride (PVC).
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 5 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Allied
b. American Flexible Conduit
c. Carlon
d. Thomas and Betts
E. Fittings
1. Rigid galvanized steel fittings shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same
material as the respective raceway system.
2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for
conduits up to 2" and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2" and larger.
3. Fittings for flexible metal conduit shall be center stopped, insulated throat, U.L.
E-11852 listed
4. Fittings for liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall have zinc plated steel ferrule,
compression type with sealing ring
5. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions
6. Connectors shall have insulated throat up to and including 1" size. For sizes 1-
1/4" and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing.
7. Die-cast or pressure cast fittings are not permitted.
8. Provide conduit bodies types, shapes and sizes as required to suit application and
NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-
resistant screws.
9. Conduit bodies are allowed instead of changing directions in boxes (obtain
approval from construction manager).
10. Acceptable manufacturers
a) O.Z. Gedney
b) Steel City
c) Thoams and Betts
d) Copper Crouse-Hinds
e) Carlon
F. Raintight Fittings (Compression EMT)
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 6 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Acceptable manufacturers: Bridgeport Fittings, O-Z Gedney, Steel City/Thomas
and Betts.
2. Design makes:.
a). Bridgeport Fittings: 26x-SRT Series coupler for 1” EMT trade size.
b) Bridgeport Fittings: 25XSRT Series connector for 1” EMT trade size.
G. Space Saver Connector Fittings
1. Rigid galvanized steel fittings shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same
material as the respective raceway system
2. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for
conduits up to 2" and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2" and larger
3. Die-cast or pressure cast fittings are not permitted
4. Provide space saver EMT conduit connectors, in compression or set screw type
as called for in the T4 detailed drawings for: cable tray, raceway entrance end
fittings, and backbox connections for communication cabling – to maximize the
cable bend radius, cross-sectional area and cable fill ratios
5. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Crouse-Hinds, Space Saver Series
6. Design make
a) #SSBC1xx Series (set screw)
b) #SSC1xx Series (compression)
H. Expansion Fittings
1. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion
joints.
2. Galvanized steel expansion joints for RGS or EMT conduit
3. Provide a minimum of 4” movement in either direction.
4. Weatherproof for outdoor applications.
5. At expansion joints in concrete pours, provide Deflection/Expansion fittings
capable of movement of ¾” in all directions from the normal.
I. Waterproofing Seals
1. Provide watertight expanding link-type seals for installation between the conduit
and the sleeve or core drilled hole.
2. Design Make: Link Seal, or approved equal
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 7 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
H. Pull and Junction Boxes
1. Shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush
or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide
screw-on type covers. Boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of rain
tight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case
shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated in Article 370 of the National
Electrical Code for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be NEMA
approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be
installed.
I. Flush floor junction boxes
1. Flush floor junction boxes shall be recessed cover boxes designed for flush
mounting in masonry.
2. Provide checkered plate gasketed cover suitable for foot traffic.
2.2 SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY
A Refer to pathway schedules on T2-series for additional surface raceway sizes, cable fill
tables, and cable radius requirements.
B TYPE SR-2 (V2400 series)
1. .875” H x 1.875”W
2. Metallic two piece raceway with single compartment.
3. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratch-resistant
surface that can be field painted.
4. Refer to T4-Series Drawings for additional information and requirements.
5. Provide the following fittings:
a) Entrance end fitting - nominal maximum dimensions of 2.62”W x 2.25”H
x 3” L. and 1” conduit knockout.
b) Back entrance end fitting - same as entrance end fitting with internal
radius.
c) Tee fittings to connect to SR-3 (3000 Series) and SR-4 (4000 Series)
raceway where T section to SR-2 (2400 Series) has maximum width equal
to SR-2 raceway
d) Bridge fitting with radius for spanning existing raceways in varying widths
from ½” to 2.
e) Flat Internal and external elbows UL verified for a 2" [51mm] bend radius
and exceeding the recommendations of EIA/TIA 569A. Internal or
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 8 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
external radius control must be provided. Derate fill capacities when
internal radius control is provided, as recommended by the manufacturer.
f) Surface 2” x 4” or 4” x 4” boxes, with 2.25” depth as called for
6. Design Make: Wiremold V2400 series raceway, V2475D series bridge fittings,
V2410 series entrance end fittings, V2415 T fittings.
7. CUSTOM FITTINGS -- Design Make: Wiremold per T4 detail drawings.
8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Mono-Systems or others as submitted by
contractor and pre-approved by Owner.
C TYPE SR-3 (V3000 Series)
1. 1.5” H x 2.75”W
2. Metallic two piece raceway with single compartment.
3. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratch-resistant
surface that can be field painted.
4. Refer to T4-Series Drawings for additional information and requirements.
5. Provide the following fittings:
a) Entrance end fitting - nominal maximum dimensions of 2.75”W x 2”H x
2.125” L. and 1” conduit knockout.
b) Back entrance end fitting - same as entrance end fitting with internal
radius.
c) Tee fittings to connect to SR-2 (2400 Series) raceway where T section to
SR-2 has maximum width equal to SR-2 raceway
d) Flat Internal and external elbows UL verified for a 2" [51mm] bend radius
and exceeding the recommendations of EIA/TIA 569A using internal or
external radius components. Internal or external radius control must be
provided. Derate fill capacities when internal radius control is provided, as
recommended by the manufacturer.
6. Design Make: Wiremold V3000 series raceway, with V3011, V3010 and V3018
fittings.
7. CUSTOM FITTINGS
a) Design Make: Wiremold per T4 detail drawings.
8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Mono-Systems or others as submitted by
contractor and pre approved by Owner.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 9 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
D. TYPE SR-4 and SR-4d (V4000 Series)
1. 1.75” H x 4.75”W
2. Metallic two piece raceway with single or divided compartment as called for on
plans.
3. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratch-resistant
surface that can be field painted.
4. Provide the following fittings:
a) Entrance end fitting - nominal maximum dimensions of 4.75”W x 2.75”H
x 6.5”L. and 1.25” conduit knockout.
b) Back entrance end fitting - same as entrance end fitting with internal
radius.
c) T fittings to connect to SR-2 (2400 Series) raceway where T section to SR-
2 has maximum width equal to SR-2 raceway
d) Flat Internal and external elbows with fiber optic radius
5. Design Make: Wiremold V4000 Series raceway, with V4010, V4017FO,
V4015FO and V4011FO fittings.
6. CUSTOM FITTINGS
a) Design Make: Wiremold per T4 detail drawings.
7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Mono-Systems or others as submitted by
contractor and pre-approved by Owner.
E. TYPE SR-7 (V700 Series)
1. One-piece raceway
2. Color shall be Ivory color and have a durable finish with a scratch-resistant
surface that can be field painted.
3. Utilized for wall mounted phones and miscellaneous branch circuit power only.
4. Provide internal and external 90 degree fittings with radius.
5. Provide miscellaneous boxes, extension rings, fittings and supports designed and
manufactured by the raceway manufacturer as required making a complete job.
6. Design Make: Wiremold V700
7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Mono-Systems or others as submitted by
contractor and pre-approved by Owner...
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 10 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
2.3 SLEEVES
A. See EMT requirements
2.4 GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A. Shall be provided for all conduits 2” and larger and longer than 10ft and shall be
bonded to the MTGB or TGB in the TR.
1. Shall facilitate a bonding path for all Sleeves and conduits back to
Telecommunication Ground bar’s in each TR.
2. Bushing shall provide protection for cables from damage.
B. Design Make
1. Arlington
2.5 WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY
A Cable Tray Finish: Carbon Steel with Zink plating.
B. Cable tray will consist of continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable
management system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and
maximum dissipation of heat, with UL Classified splices where tray acts as
Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC). Wire mesh cable tray will have
continuous Safe/T/Edge T/welded top side wire to protect cable insulation
and installers.
C. Provide splices, supports, and other fittings necessary for a complete,
continuously grounded system.
1. Mesh: 2 x 4 inches (50 x 100 mm).
2. Straight Section Lengths: 118 inches (3,000 mm).
3. Wire Diameter: Patented design includes varying wire sizes to
meet application oad requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to
allow tray to remain lightweight.
4. Safe/T/Edge: Patented Safe/T/Edge technology on side wire to
protect cable insulation and installers’ hands.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 11 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
5. Fittings: Wire mesh cable tray fittings are field/fabricated from
straight tray sections, in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and Item 2.3.
6. CF Series Cable Tray Size:
7. Depth: Cable tray shall be available in the following depths:
a) [1 inch (30 mm)]
b) [2 inches (54 mm)]
c) [4 inches (105 mm)]
d) [6 inches (150 mm)]
8. Width: Cable tray width will be available in the following widths:
a) [2 inches (50 mm)]
b) [4 inches (100 mm)]
c) [6 inches (150 mm)]
d) [8 inches (200 mm)]
e) [12 inches (300 mm)]
f) [18 inches (450 mm)]
g) [20 inches (500 mm)]
h) [24 inches (600 mm)]
9. Length: Cable tray section length will be 118 inches (3000mm)
unless otherwise shown on drawings.
D. Support cable tray as recommended by manufacture. Provide a safety
loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a
simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed.
E. Refer to pathway schedules for Cable Tray sizing and types additional
requirements
F. Refer to program standard detail Drawing for additional Cable Tray details
and requirements
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 12 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Design Makes: Legrand Cablofil Wire Mesh
H. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Cooper B/line Flextray
2. Approved equal
2.6 ENCLOSED CABLE TRAY
A. Solid Bottom Cable Trays shall be one piece construction bottom and
sides. Provide all required fittings for a complete system. Refer to
drawings T4 Series detailed drawings for additional requirements
B. Standard length of 10’/0” per section.
C. All cable trays shall be provided with flanged lay/on covers. Covers shall
be a maximum of 5’ in length. Provide shorter sections of cover at beam
crossings and pull box connections.
D. Wrap around type bolted connector to connect tray sections.
E. Minimum inside radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special
radius elbows where required for field conditions or as called for.
Horizontal and Vertical bends for solid bottom trays shall have solid bottoms
Support cable tray as recommended by manufacture. Provide a safety
loading factor of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a
simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed.
F. Cable tray, cover, and all supporting devices shall be painted to match
existing surroundings when exposed, Cable tray shall not be painted when
exposed in mechanical and Telecommunication Rooms (TR’s), as called
for on the T2 series drawings. When required, cable tray and cover shall
be painted by the manufacture with a baked on finish. Provide color
sample with submittal.
G. Provide panel connector type end fitting to finish open ends of cable trays
at Telecommunication Rooms
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 13 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
H. Provide screw/on covers for vertical section of cable trays and secure
upon cable placement
I. Provide cable support mounting means in all vertical section of cable trays
J. Refer to T2/Series Drawing pathway schedules for Cable Tray sizing and
types additional requirements
K. Refer to AT/CU standard installation details for additional Cable Tray
details and requirements
L. Design Makes: LeGrand Fiber Trough Cable Tray, Wiremold SpecMate Series, or
Monno/Systems Steel L series for new cable.
M. Acceptable Manufacturers: Approved equal
2.7 CABLE HANGERS ( J-HOOK)
A. Provide prefabricated, zinc coated, carbon steel hangers designed specifically for UTP
and Optical Fiber cable installations.
B. Hangers shall have open top, rolled edges and a 3” or 4” minimum
diameter loop.
C. Provide beam clamps, rod fasteners, flange clips and brackets as job
conditions require.
D. Design Make CADDY CAT CM
E. Refer to AT/CU standard installation details for additional Cable hanger
pathway (J/Hook) details and requirements
2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Supports, support hardware and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or
treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish
or inherent material characteristic. Products used fin outdoor applications shall be hot
dipped galvanized.
B. Provide clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded c clamps with retainers,
ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps as applicable.
C. 14 gauge U-Channel systems with 9/16 inch diameter holes at a minimum of 1 7/8
inches on center in the top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that match and mate
channel.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 14 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Provide carbon steel or wedge or sleeve type expansion anchors, steel springhead
toggle bolts and heat-treated steel power driven threaded stud fastening equipment as
required by construction types.
E. Provided field fabricated supporting devices such as angles, channels, pipe supports,
etc. All fabricated supports shall be of metal construction as called for in 2.1.
2.9 COMMUNICATIONS/POWER POLES
A. Provide aluminum multi-service power pole.
B. Pole shall include 2 electrically isolated channels to act as raceway for communications
cabling and future electrical wiring.
C. Include ceiling trim plate, low voltage entrance fitting, t-bar mounting bracket and
carpet / floor grippers.
D. Design Make: Legrand TPP series or approved equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT
A. Conduit:
1. Electrical Metallic Tubing, Rigid Metal Conduit and Flexible metal conduit is are
allowed Conduit types.
2. Install with a minimum of bends and offsets. Bends shall not kink or destroying
the interior cross section of the raceway. Factory made bends shall be used for
raceway’s 1" trade size and larger. Bends radius shall be 6 times the internal
diameter for conduit sizes up to 2 inches. A conduit greater than 2 inch shall have
bend radius at least 10 times the diameter of the conduit.
3. Runs exceeding 100 feet or 180 degrees total bends shall be broken with suitable
sized pull or splice boxes. (LB or similar conduit fittings are not acceptable for
runs of riser cables. Verify applicability before installing such fitting
4. Do not locate riser pull boxes at bends without prior review and approval by
owner. Where possible use instead sweeps for the bend and locate in a straight
pull nearby.
5. Conduit runs to work areas shall not loop through one communication outlet to
feed another outlet.
6. Conduits shall be sized to accept 50% future growth; sizing shall account for fire
code capacity restrictions.
7. Plug the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to
prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction.
8. Secure within three feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 15 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
9. Provide a poly pull line in all "Spare" or "Empty" conduit runs to facilitate future
installation of cables.
10. Install raceways in concrete floor slabs as follows:
a) All conduits in concrete floor slabs shall be rigid galvanized steel with
concrete tight threaded fittings.
b) Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints.
c) Install conduit below the reinforcing mesh.
d) Locate conduits to provide a minimum of 1” of concrete around conduit.
e) Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to installing
conduit larger than 1" trade size in concrete slabs.
f) Wherever a cluster of four-(4) or more conduits rise out of floor exposed,
provide neatly formed 4-in. high concrete envelope, with chamfered edges,
around raceways.
11. Provide conduit supports based on the following table:
Conduit Trade
Size Type of Run
Horizontal
Spacing in
Feet
Vertical Spacing in
Feet
½”, ¾” Concealed 7 10
1”, 1 ¼” Concealed 8 10
1 ½”, & LARGER Concealed 10 10
½”, ¾” Exposed 5 7
1”, 1 ¼” Exposed 7 8
1 ½” & larger Exposed 10 10
12. Where conduits puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the
roof warranty is maintained.
13. Conduit System Installation:
a) Cable in exterior, above grade locations: Rigid Galvanized Steel
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 16 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
b) Interior locations: Electrical Metallic Tubing
c) Cable below grade: PVC Schedule 40
14. Identification: Clearly label conduit at exposed ends indicating closet or outlet
where conduit terminates and the length of the conduit. Label pull boxes
indicating destination of conduits entering and exiting.
15. Include intra- and inter-building raceways. Including conduits, sleeves and trays
for the placement of cables from the communications center to communications
closets, from the communications center to the entrance room or space and from
communication center to communication center in different building in a campus
environment.
B. Conduit fill shall be as follows:
Trade Size
Area of Conduit
(square inches)
1 Cable
53% Fill
(sq. in.)
2 Cables
31% Fill
(sq. in.)
3 Cables &
Over
40% Fill
(sq. in.)
¾” 0.53 0.28 0.16 0.21
1” 0.87 0.46 0.27 0.35
1 ¼” 1.51 0.80 0.47 0.60
1 ½” 2.05 1.09 0.64 0.82
2” 3.39 1.80 1.05 1.36
2 ½” 4.82 2.56 1.49 1.93
3” 7.45 3.95 2.31 2.98
3 ½” 9.96 5.28 3.09 3.98
4” 12.83 6.80 3.98 5.13
5” 20.15 10.68 6.25 8.06
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 17 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Backbone pathways shall be in the form of 4” conduits or sleeves between the main
communication equipment rooms and spaces and closets shall be provided as shown on
drawings:
D. Fire stop all pathways as called for in 27 05 00.
E. All backbone conduits shall be marked with 1” reflective tape every 25 feet.
Coordinate color with owner.
F. Pull boxes shall be marked with 1” wide reflective tape.
G. Stub out conduits into closets only enough to attach connector and bushings, vertical
conduits shall rise a minimum of 6 inches above the finished floor.
H. Bush all conduit ends.
I. Conduits shall be concealed except in the following areas:
1. Mechanical Rooms
2. Electric Rooms
3. Manufacturing areas
4. Garage or maintenance areas
5. Unfinished basements or crawl spaces
6. Telecommunications rooms
7. Utility chaseways
J. Do not install raceways adjacent to hot surfaces or in wet areas.
K. Install conduits to edges of access boxes so as to maximize the total number of conduits
that can be routed through the pull box.
L. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints.
M. Do not install conduit horizontally in concrete or block partitions.
N. Arrange neatly to permit access to the raceway, outlet, pull, and junction boxes, and
work installed by other trades.
O. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the
attention of the Owner's Representative and receive written approval both as to location
and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than
absolutely necessary. If allowed, the contractor shall arrange for and receive a burn
permit per University standards, requirements or as directed.
P. Core drill, sleeve, and fire stop all penetrations through existing floors.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 18 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
Q. Support all raceways with malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved method. In
exterior or wet locations, provide minimum ¼” air space between raceway and wall.
Secure raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
R. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Equipment, piping, ducts
and the like shall not block access to boxes. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes
required due to field conditions and size as required by the National Electrical Code.
S. Conduits shall be installed with a pull string with a minimum test rating of 200lbs.
3.2 SLEEVES
A. Support, fire stop and size as per drawing
3.3 CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Tray routing shown on the plans is diagrammatical only. Contractor shall field
verify all routes and potential existing utility/structural conflicts. Contractor to verify all
major tie-in points, floor penetrations, existing ceiling access panels, ceiling elevations,
existing mechanical ductwork and equipment, existing sleeves and corridor wall
penetrations that may conflict with the new cable tray installation, etc. prior to the start
of construction. Coordinate proposed routing changes and offsets with the owner in
advance. All routing changes shall be at no additional cost to the contract.
B. Hang Cable tray using threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through
support steel and double nutted. Size support member within load rating of member
section; and without visible deflection. Install cable tray level and straight.
C. Provide seismic bracing as required by code.
D. Provide stiffeners to prevent lateral movement and stabilize cable tray. Provide
minimally one stiffener assembly per vertical support (threaded rod).
E. A minimum of 12” headroom shall be provided above all cable trays.
F A minimum of 18” side clearance shall be provided for all cable trays.
G. Provide aluminum body expansion connectors at building expansion joints. Minimum
4-in. movements, greater if expansion movement conditions warrant.
H. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves, crossovers and at other
locations where tray continuity is interrupted.
I. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers, connectors,
clamps, rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job,
coordinate with the manufacturer.
J. Provide (1) 6” long piece of ½” EMT conduit or snap on covers on each threaded rod
hanger to prevent scoring of cable insulation when cable is pulled in.
3.4 CABLE HANGERS (J-HOOKS)
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 19 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
A. Provide cable hangers a maximum of 3’ on center wherever cable tray or conduit is not
present for support low voltage cabling.
B. Ceiling ties and rods shall not be used to hang cable or cable supports without the
approval of the Owner.
C. Load hangers as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide hangers side by side on a
common bracket where cable quantities require.
D. Do not install cables loose above lock-in type, drywall or plaster ceilings.
E. Cables shall be installed at least 3 in. above the ceiling tiles and shall not touch the
ceiling.
F. Do not support cable from ceiling system tie wires or grid in fire rated systems.
G. Provide a minimum of 2 spare bracket mounted hangers in new construction.
3.5 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tilt as
required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for
installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet, provide floor outlet with
carpet flange.
B. Furniture layout. Provide coordination drawings for approval.
3.6 BOXES AND CABINETS
A. Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study
architectural, electrical, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in,
etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate
outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., are placed in position,
outlet will serve its desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings,
contact Owner's Representative for decision prior to installation.
B. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the
approval of the Owner's Representative.
C. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring device(s) to be installed.
D. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled walls shall be installed
with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers.
E. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed with extra-
deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2" deep boxes with square corners and
dimensions to accommodate conductors installed.
F. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4" square, 1-1/2" deep,
galvanized sheet metal.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 20 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Surface wall mounted metallic outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes having threaded or
compression type threadless hubs. Exterior boxes shall be cast type with threaded hubs
and gasketed cover plates secured by non-ferrous screws.
H. Where structural or other interference prevent compliance with mounting heights listed,
consult Owner's Representative for approval to change location before installation.
I. Where communications outlets are shown on, behind, below or above furniture or
millwork. Verify the exact location and mounting height with the project coordinator.
The electrical contractor shall be responsible for moving all communications outlets
that are in conflict with furniture or millwork, including cutting, patching and painting,
at no cost to the owner
J. Pull boxes shall have a distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the
opposite wall of the box of at least 6 times the trade-size diameter of the largest
raceway, this distance being increased by the sum of the trade size diameters of the
other raceways on the same wall of the box and have a distance between the nearest
edges of each raceway enclosing the same conductor of at least 6 times the trade size
diameter of the raceway or 6 times the trade size diameter of the larger raceway if they
are of different sizes.
K. Install outlet boxes as per sizes indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.
3.7 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Hangers and Supports:
1. Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper
support of wall-mounted cabinets, racks, panels, etc.
2. Cabinets, large pull boxes, and cable support boxes shall be secured to ceiling
and floor slab and not supported from conduits. Small equipment boxes, etc., as
approved by Owner's Representative, may be supported on walls. Racks for
support of conduit and heavy equipment shall be secured to building construction
by substantial structural supports.
3.8 FURNITURE RACEWAYS
A. Furniture Pathways - Shall comply with UL 1286 and NEC Article 605.
B. It shall be the contractors responsibility to verify the furniture layout and
communication outlet with respect to the furniture. Obtain approved shop drawings
from the architect detailing furniture heights, cable openings etc.. Prior to roughing in
the outlet box verify height and location for all communication outlets near furniture or
cabinetry. Boxes roughed in the wrong location shall be relocated at the contractors
expense.
C. Provide a concealed transition from outlet box to furniture.
3.9 GENERAL
A. Support raceways from building construction. Do not support raceways from
ductwork, piping, or equipment hangers.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PATHWAYS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 28 – PAGE 21 OF 21
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Support outlet, pull, and junction boxes independently from building construction. Do
not support from raceways.
C. Coordinate all raceway runs with other trades.
D. All open raceways shall be installed a minimum of 6 in. away from any light fixture or
other source of EMI (Electro-magnetic interference).
E. All horizontal pathways shall be bonded and grounded per the NEC Article 250.
F. In all cases horizontal pathways shall be sized for a minimum of 50% future growth.
END OF SECTION
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 1 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 27 05 53
TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION
PART 1– GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the complete installation of
work called for in the Contract Documents
1.2 SCOPE
A. This section includes the minimum requirements for the testing, certification
administration and identification of backbone and horizontal cabling.
B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
1. Contractor Qualifications
2. Tester Calibrations / Factory Requirements
3. UTP testing and testers
4. Labels and labeling
5. Reports
6. Documentation
7. Record Copy and As-Builts
8. Test and Acceptance
9. Warranty
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All testing procedures, testers and identification and administration work specified shall
comply with applicable requirements of:
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A Administration Standards.
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569A Pathway and Spaces
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling For
Customer Premises
4. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
Components and Testing
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 2 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
5. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Component Standard and
Testing
6.
7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-x Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic
Systems
8. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-14A Power Loss Measurements of Install
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant
9. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-7 Measurement of Optical Loss of Installed
Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 598-A Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
11. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 504-x FOCIS x Documents for Fiber Optic
Connector Intermateability Standards
12. TIA/EIA-J-STD-037 Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing)
and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications
13. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology - Generic Cabling
for Customer Premises
14. BICSI TDMM Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual, current edition
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers catalog sheets and specifications for each cable testers, test heads and
adapter cords and latest version of software applicable for each tester planned for use.
B. Provide written factory calibration recommendation letter and factory recommended field
calibration intervals with bid.
C. Provide signed manufacturer factory calibration certification for each copper and fiber
tester owned at time of bid response as a submittal. Certification shall have serial
number, date and version of software of each tester.
D. For each UTP field tester planned for use on this project, provide a letter from the tester
manufacturer and the connectivity/cable manufacturers indicating compatibility and
compliance to Category 6 permanent link and the Category 6, channel tests with the
products identified for use on this project and the warranty requirements called for by the
manufacturers. Contractor shall provide testers and equipment that fully conform to
Panduit’s testing requirements for system warranty as specified in the Approved Category
6 Test Lead/Cord Adapters document, at:
http://www.panduit.com/products/SpecificationGuides/068804.pdf
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 3 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
E. Sample documentation from previous job for administration, test results and as-built
drawings.
F. At time of testing, provide a factory calibration certificate for each tester used and include
these in each test report binder at the completion of the project.
G. Test reports (submit prior to substantial completion punch list is performed)
H. Two copies on compact disks containing all summary reports, full plot data test results,
tester software tools required to view and inspect and print any selection of the test
reports, spreadsheets, end to end reports and as built drawings called for at the
completion of job.. The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on
CD-ROM including the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection
of test reports.
I. Technician certificates for successful completion of training for each of the field testers
proposed to be used in this project.
J. Two copies in binder format and two copies on compact disks containing all digital
photographs called for at the completion of the job.
K. Refer to Section 01340 – “Shop Drawings, Product Data” and 27 05 00 for additional
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VERIZON CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION AND TESTING
A. Not Included in this project
2.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
A. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A.
B. Field test instruments for multimode fiber cabling shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7.
C. Multimode optical fiber light source
1. Provide 850nm and 1300nm +/- 20 nm wavelength LED light sources
2. Spectral width of sources shall be </= 50nm for 850nm wavelengths and </=
140nm for 1300nm wavelengths.
3. The output of the light source shall be 8 MW for 62.5um core optical fiber
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 4 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
4. Output Stability +/- 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C
5. Long Term output stability +/- 0.10dB at 25 degrees C
6. Power shall be from rechargeable Ni-Cad batteries
7. Connector types shall include: SMA, FC, ST and SC
8. Design make: Siecor Light source
9. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Fluke
b) Wavetek
c) Lantek
d) AMP NetConnect
e) Corning Cable Systems
D. Single mode optical fiber light source
1. Provide 1300nm and 1500nm +/- 20 nm wavelength Laser light sources
2. Output Stability +/- 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C
3. Long Term output stability +/- 0.10dB at 25 degrees C
4. Power shall be from rechargeable Ni-Cad batteries
5. Connector types shall include: SMA, FC, ST and SC
6. Design make: Siecor OS-200D
7. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Fluke
b) Meson
c) AMP NetConnect
d) Corning Cable Systems
E. Optical Power Meter
1. Calibrates against the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
standard.
2. Provide 850nm, 1300nm and 1500nm +/- 20 nm wavelength test capability
3. Measurement range shall be from 10 to -60 dBm
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 5 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
4. Accuracy shall be +/- 5% at 0 to -50dBm and +/- 10% 10 to 0dBm and -50 to-60
dBm.
5. Resolution shall be 0.1 dB
6. Connector types shall include: SMA, FC, ST and SC
7. Design make: Siecor OM-100F
8. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Fluke
b) Meson
c) AMP NetConnect
d) Corning Cable Systems
F. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
1. Dual selectable wavelength: 850/1300 nm for multimode
2. Dual selectable wavelength: 1310/1550 nm for singlemode
3. Selectable cable index of refraction.
4. Visual fault locator for continuity checks and dead zone fault protection.
5. Display and printer connection for hard-copy documentation
6. Equipped with launch jumper cable of sufficient length to offset entry”
deadzone”.
2.3 100 OHM UTP TEST EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. Field test instruments shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2
Annex B and Annex I.
2. Test equipment used under this contract shall be from manufacturers that have a
minimum of 5 years experience in producing field test equipment.
3. Manufacturers must be ISO 9001 certified.
4. All test tools of a given type shall be from the same manufacturer, and have
compatible electronic results output.
5. Test adapter cables/test heads must be approved by the manufacturer of the test
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 6 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
equipment, for the specific cable and connectivity product used on this project.
Adapters from other sources are not acceptable. Obtain written confirmation that
the test heads and adapter planned fro use are proper and also obtain a written
confirmation from the wire and connectivity manufactures that they also agree
with the test heads and adapter selection chosen by the tester manufacturer.
6. Baseline accuracy of the test equipment must exceed TIA Level IIIe, as indicated
by independent laboratory testing.
7. A level IIIe test unit is required to verify category 6 performance for both
Category 6 permanent link and channel performance.
8. Test equipment must be capable of certifying Category 5, 5e, and 6 links.
9. Test equipment must have a dynamic range of at least 100 dB to minimize
measurement uncertainty.
10. Test equipment must be capable of storing full frequency sweep data for all tests
and printing color graphical reports for all swept measurements.
11. Test equipment must include S-Band time domain diagnostics for NEXT and
return loss (TDNXT and TDRL) for accurate and efficient troubleshooting.
12. Test equipment must be capable of running individual NEXT, return loss, etc
measurements in addition to autotests. Individual tests increase productivity
when diagnosing faults.
13. Test equipment must include a library of cable types by major manufacturer.
14. Test equipment must store at least 1000 Category 6 or 6 autotests in internal
memory.
15. Test equipment must be able to internally group autotests and cables in project
folders for good records management.
16. Test equipment must include technology for support of advanced measurements.
17. Test equipment must make swept frequency measurements in compliance with
TIA standards.
18. The measurement reference plane of the test equipment shall start immediately at
the output of the test equipment interface connector. There shall not be a time
domain dead zone of any distance that excludes any part of the link from the
measurement.
19. The basic tests required are:
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 7 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
a) · Wire Map
b) · Length
c) · Attenuation
d) · NEXT (Near end crosstalk)
e) · Return Loss
f) · ELFEXT Loss
g) · Propagation Delay
h) · Delay skew
i) · PSNEXT (Power sum near-end crosstalk loss)
j) · PSELFEXT (Power sum equal level far-end crosstalk loss)
20. Shall be able to test cable for compliance with all of the following standards:
a) TIA Category 6: Permanent Link and Channel
b) ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 Class C, D and E: Link
c) ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 Class C, D and E: Permanent Link or
Channel
d) Aus/NZ Class C and D: Basic Link or Channel
e) STP cabling, (IBM Type 1, 150 ohm)
f) ANSI TP-PMD IEEE 802.3 10BASE5, 10BASE2: Ethernet with coaxial
cabling
g) IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T: Ethernet with
twisted pair cabling IEEE 802.5: Token Ring, 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps
21. Shall perform the following tests as a minimum:
a) NEXT, NEXT @ Remote
b) Wire Map
c) Characteristic Impedance
d) Length
e) DC Loop Resistance
f) Propagation Delay Return Loss (RL), RL @ Remote
g) Delay Skew
h) Attenuation
i) Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio (ACR), ACR @ Remote
j) Power Sum ACR, PSACR @ Remote
k) ELFEXT, ELFEXT @ Remote
l) Power Sum ELFEXT, PSELFEXT @ Remote
m) Power Sum NEXT, PSNEXT @ Remote
22. Shall use injector for complete wire mapping and TDR for determining cable
length.
23. Shall measure NEXT for all six pair combinations and Attenuation on all four
pairs from 1.0 to 350 MHz.
24. Design Make: Fluke “DSP 4000 or 4300 series”
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 8 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
25. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) Agilent
b) WaveTek
c) Lantek
d) Wirescope
2.4 LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.
B. Shall be preprinted or laser printed type. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.
C. Where used for cable marking provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area and a
clear “tail” that self laminates the printed area when wrapped around the cable. If cable
jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any other color than white,
preferably orange or yellow – so that the labels are easily distinguishable.
D. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. WH Brady
2. Panduit
3. Ideal:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COPPER CABLE TEST
A. A level IIIe test unit is required to verify category 6 performances, shall be updated
with the latest version of tester software at time of testing and shall be factory
tested/calibrated within one of time of testing. Provide copies of factory certification
for each tester owned at time of bid response as a submittal. At time of testing,
provide a factory calibration certificate for tester used and include these in each test
report binder at the completion of the project.
B Visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect possible cable
damage incurred during shipping and transport. Visibly damaged goods are to be
returned to the supplier and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. If post-manufacture performance data has been supplied by the manufacturer of cables
or connecting hardware, copies of such data are to be kept for inclusion in the
Documentation for final Record Copy deliverables and made available to the Owner
upon request.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 9 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
D. Test 100% of installed backbone copper cabling for
1. Wire Map
2. Length
E. Provide documentation in hardcopy and electronic formats, organized the same as
outlined in 27 05 53, Sections 3.5.W “Third Party Verification” and Section 3.6 “Test
Documentation” of this section.
3.2 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING
A. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system.
B. Comply with Tier-two testing as defined in TSB-140. which included loss and length
testing with an optical loss test set (OLTS) and also an OTDR trace of the installed
cable plant. By incorporating the proposed two-tier testing method, installers have the
most complete picture of the fiber installation and network owners have proof of a
quality installation
C. Testing shall consist of an end to end power meter test performed per EIA/TIA-455-
53A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and/or 1300 nanometers
for multimode fibers and 1310 and/or 1550 nanometers for single mode fibers. These
tests also include continuity checking of each fiber.
D. There shall be no splices unless clearly called for.
E. Test all fibers with launch and far end cable of sufficient length for the OTDR to be
able to see through all installed connectors.
F. Localized attenuation shall not exceed 0.5 dB at any point.
G. Backbone multimode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 850nm and 1300
nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A method B.
H. Backbone single mode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 1310nm and 1550.
I. For horizontal cabling system using multimode optical fiber, attenuation shall be
measured in one direction at either 850 nanometer (nm) or 1300 nm using an LED
light source and power meter.
J. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm (or
1310 and 1550 nm for singlemode) in one direction.
K. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-
526-14 Standard, Method B.
L. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall
test each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. ONLY
BASIC LINK TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 10 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
cords to complete the circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be
the same used for the test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be
those defined in the ANSI/TIA/EIA Standard.
M. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using two-meter
jumpers to attach the test equipment to the cable plant. The light source shall be left
in place after calibration and the power meter moved to the far end to take
measurements.
N. Backbone Cable
1. Test the cable on the reel for continuity before installing it, to insure no
damage was done in shipment from the manufacturer to the job site.
2. After installation and termination, test each segment of the cable plant
individually as it is installed, to insure each connector and cable is good.
3. Link attenuation is the only required field test except for the patched runs in
the campus backbone system where an OTDR test will be required. Use
launch cables at each end and provide print outs showing all connectors.
OTDR will also be required to determine bad connections or damage when
the link attenuation test fails.
4. Maximum localized attenuation allowed is 2dB.
5. Backbone multimode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 850nm and
1300 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A method B.
6. Backbone single mode fiber shall be tested in one direction at both 1310nm
and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A method A.1.
7. Multimode fiber shall conform to the following:
850 nm:
Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB)
500 3.5
1000 5.5
1500 7.5
2000 9.0
1300 nm:
Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB)
500 2.2
1000 3.0
1500 3.8
2000 4.5
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 11 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
8. Single Mode Fiber shall conform to the following (note: taken at 1550nm)
Inside:
Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB)
500 2.0
1000 2.5
1500 3.0
2000 3.5
2500 4.0
3000 4.5
Outside:
Length (meters) Attenuation ( dB)
500 1.8
1000 2.0
1500 2.2
2000 2.5
2500 2.8
3000 3.0
O. Documentation
1. Provide attenuation and cable length test results for all installed cable pairs.
3.3 TEST REPORTS
A. Provide documentation in hardcopy and electronic formats, organized the same as
outlined in 27 05 53, Sections 3.5.W “Data Reporting and Accuracy” and Section 3.6
“Test Documentation” of this section.
3.4 100 OHM UTP CABLE TESTING
GENERAL
A. Every cabling link shall be tested in accordance with the field test specifications
defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 “Transmission Performance Specifications for
4-pair 100Ω Category 6 Cabling and as defined in the Manufacturer warranty
requirements. Refer to item 1.4 submittals for additional information.
B. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program
and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests.
C. The test equipment shall comply with the accuracy requirements for level IIIe field
testers as defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1. The tester including the appropriate
interface adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy
requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter
contribution) are specified in Table B.2 of Annex B of the TIA Cat 6 Standard. (Table
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 12 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
B.3 in this TIA document specifies the accuracy requirements for the Channel
configuration.
D. The tester shall be within the calibration period recommended by the vendor in order
to achieve the vendor-specified measurement accuracy.
E. The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any
twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters.
In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface
adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return
Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof
that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor.
To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss
change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction.
F. A Pass or Fail result for each parameter is determined by comparing the measured
values with the specified test limits for that parameter. The test result of a parameter
shall be marked with an asterisk (*) when the result is closer to the test limit than the
accuracy of the field tester. The field tester manufacturer must provide documentation
as an aid to interpret results marked with asterisks.
G. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation
and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the
requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.
H. All pairs of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. Any
defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors,
feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or
replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all cables installed.
The testing parameters called for in this section shall apply for up to 90 meters of
horizontal cable, a work area equipment cord, an RJ45 outlet and 2 cross connect
connections in the closet.
The test parameters shall include Wire Map, Length, Attenuation and NEXT
Wire Map
1. The wire map test shall verify pair to pin termination at each end and check
for connectivity errors. Wire Map shall report Pass if the wiring of each wire-
pair from end to end is determined to be correct. The Wire Map results shall
include the continuity of the shield connection if present The wire map shall
indicate the following for each of the eight conductors:
a) Continuity to the remote end
b) Shorts between any two or more conductors
c) Crossed pairs
d) Reversed Pairs
e) Split Pairs
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 13 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
f) Any other miswiring
Cable Length
The field tester shall be capable of measuring length of all pairs of a basic link or
channel based on the propagation delay measurement and the average value for NVP.
The physical length of the link shall be calculated using the pair with the shortest
electrical delay. This length figure shall be reported and shall be used for making the
Pass/Fail decision. The Pass/Fail criteria are based on the maximum length allowed
for the Permanent Link configuration (90 meters – 295 feet) plus 10% to allow for the
variation and uncertainty of NVP.
2. The set-up configuration of the NVP shall be based solely on the NVP value
of the cable specified in the approved cable submittal for this project.
Insulation characteristics and twist rate of the wire pair influence NVP in
minor ways and is dependent on the specific manufacturer. Typically, an
‘average’ value for NVP is published for all four wire-pairs in a data cable.
Insertion Loss (Attenuation)
Insertion Loss is a measure of signal loss in the permanent link or channel.
The term “Attenuation” has been used to designate “Insertion Loss.” Insertion
Loss shall be tested from 1 MHz through 250 MHz in maximum step size of 1
MHz. It is preferred to measure insertion loss at the same frequency intervals
as NEXT Loss in order to provide a more accurate calculation of the
Attenuation-to-Crosstalk ratio (ACR) parameter.
Minimum test result documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for): Identify the worst wire pair (1 of 4 possible). The test results for
the worst wire pair must show the highest attenuation value measured (worst case), the
frequency at which this worst case value occurs, and the test limit value at this
frequency.
NEXT Loss
Pair-to-pair near-end crosstalk loss (abbreviated as NEXT Loss) shall be
tested for each wire pair combination from each end of the link (a total of 12
pair combinations). This parameter is to be measured from 1 through 250
MHz. NEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire pair at the end
from which the disturbance signal is transmitted (near-end) on the disturbing
pair.
The maximum step size for NEXT Loss measurements shall not exceed the
maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1, column 2.
3. Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in
format and quantities called for): Identify the wire pair combination that
exhibits the worst case NEXT margin and the wire pair combination that
exhibits the worst value of NEXT (worst case).
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 14 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
4. NEXT is to be measured from each end of the link-under-test. These wire pair
combinations must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each
reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the
test limit value at this frequency.
Frequency Range (MHz) Maximum Step Sixe (MHz)
1 – 31.25 0.15
31.26 – 100 0.25
100 – 250 0.50
250 - 350 1.00
TABLE 1
PSNEXT Loss
Power Sum NEXT Loss shall be evaluated and reported for each wire pair from both
ends of the link under-test (a total of eight results). PSNEXT Loss captures the
combined near-end crosstalk effect (statistical) on a wire pair when all other pairs
actively transmit signals. Like NEXT this test parameter must be evaluated from 1
through 250 MHz and the step size may not exceed the maximum step size defined in
the standard as shown in Table 1, column 2.
Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and
the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for PSNEXT. These wire pairs must be
identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include
the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 15 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
ELFEXT Loss, pair to pair
Pair-to-pair FEXT Loss shall be measured for each wire-pair combination from both
ends of the link under-test. FEXT Loss measures the crosstalk disturbance on a wire
pair at the opposite end (far-end) from which the transmitter emits the disturbing
signal on the disturbing pair. FEXT is measured to compute ELFEXT Loss that must
be evaluated and reported in the test results. ELFEXT measures the relative strength
of the far-end crosstalk disturbance relative to the attenuated signal that arrives at the
end of the link. This test yields 24 wire pair combinations. ELFEXT is to be measured
from 1 through 250 MHz and the maximum step size for FEXT Loss measurements
shall not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as in Table 1, column
2.
Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for): Identify the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst-case
margin and the wire pair combination that exhibits the worst value for ELFEXT.
These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each
reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit
value at this frequency.
PSELFEXT Loss
Power Sum ELFEXT is a calculated parameter that combines the effect of the FEXT
disturbance from three wire pairs on the fourth one. This test yields eight wire-pair
combinations. Each wire-pair is evaluated from 1 through 250 MHz in frequency
increments that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as
shown in Table 1, column 2.
Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for):): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst pair combinations
must be identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should
include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this
frequency.
Return Loss
Return Loss (RL) measures the total energy reflected on each wire pair. Return Loss is
to be measured from both ends of the link-under-test for each wire pair. This
parameter is also to be measured form 1 through 250 MHz in frequency increments
that do not exceed the maximum step size defined in the standard as shown in Table 1,
column 2.
Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for): Identify the wire pair that exhibits the worst-case margin and the
wire pair that exhibits the worst value for Return Loss. These wire pairs must be
identified for the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 16 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency
ACR (Attention to crosstalk ratio)
This parameter is not demanded by the standard but may be required in order to obtain
the premise wiring manufacturer’s warranty]. ACR provides an indication of
bandwidth for the two wire-pair network applications. ACR is a computed parameter
that is analogous to ELFEXT and expresses the signal to noise ratio for a two wire-
pair system. This calculation yields 12 combinations – six from each end of the link.
Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair
combination that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair combination that
exhibits the worst value for ACR. These wire pair combinations must be identified for
the tests performed from each end. Each reported case should include the frequency at
which it occurs as well as the test limit value at this frequency
PSACR
NOTE: This parameter is not required by the standard but may be required in order to
obtain the premise wiring vendor’s warranty. Provide as required for Manufacturer
Warranty.
The Power Sum version of ACR is based on PSNEXT and takes into account the
combined NEXT disturbance of all adjacent wire pairs on each individual pair. This
calculation yields eight combinations –one for each wire pair from both ends of the
link. Minimum test results documentation (summary results): Identify the wire pair
that exhibits the worst-case margin and the wire pair that exhibits the worst value for
PSACR. These wire pairs must be identified for the tests performed from each end.
Each reported case should include the frequency at which it occurs as well as the test
limit value at this frequency.
Propagation Delay
Propagation delay is the time required for the signal to travel from one of the link to
the other. This measurement is to be performed for each of the four wire pairs.
Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for): Identify the wire pair with the worst-case propagation delay. The
report shall include the propagation delay value measured as well as the test limit
value
Delay Skew (as defined in TIA/EIA-568-B.1; Section 11.2.4.11)
This parameter shows the difference in propagation delay between the four wire pairs.
The pair with the shortest propagation delay is the reference pair with a delay skew
value of zero.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 17 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
Minimum test results documentation (summary report and full plot data, in format and
quantities called for): Identify the wire pair with the worst-case propagation delay (the
longest propagation delay). The report shall include the delay skew value measured as
well as the test limit value.
DATA REPORTING AND ACCURACY
The test results information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field
tester upon completion of the test.
The test results records saved by the tester shall be transferred into a Windows™-
based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of
these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are
transferred to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the tester” at the end of each test and
that these results cannot be modified at a later time.
The database for the completed job shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM
including the software tools required to view, inspect, organized, manage and print
any selection of test reports. The detailed test result data to be provided in the
electronic database for each tested link must contain the frequency-dependent test
parameters, the value measured at every frequency during the test is stored. The PC-
resident database program must be able to process the stored results to display and
print a color graph of the measured parameters. The PC-resident software must also
provide a summary numeric format in which some critical information is provided
numerically as defined by the summary results (minimum numeric test results
documentation) as outlined above for each of the test parameters.
A paper copy of the test results shall be provided that lists all the links that have been
tested with the following SUMMARY REPORT information:
a) The identification of the link in accordance with the naming
convention defined in the overall system documentation
b) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test including the
NEXT Headroom (overall worst case) number
c) The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the
tester
5. General Information to be provided in the electronic data base with the test
results information for each link:
a) The identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user
b) The identification of the link in accordance with the naming
convention defined in the overall system documentation
c) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test
d) The name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results
e) The cable type and the value of NVP used for length calculations
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 18 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
f) The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the
tester
g) The brand name, model and serial number of the tester
h) The identification of the tester interface
i) The revision of the tester software and the revision of the test
standards database in the tester
j) The test results information must contain the information on each of
the required test parameters listed in this section of the specifications
6. General: a Pass or Fail result for each parameter shall be determined by the
allowable limits for each parameter. If the test result of a parameter is closer to
the test limit than the accuracy of the tester it shall be marked with an asterisk.
Data at all measured points shall be uploaded to a P.C. and printed on a laser
printer.
7. Wire Map: Wire map tests shall be marked “Pass” if wiring is determined
correct.
8. Length: Test results shall be provided in meters and marked “Pass or Fail”
based on the length vs. allowable length.
9. Submit copies in binder format and on compact disks containing all summary
reports, full plot data test results, tester software tools required to view and
inspect and print any selection of the test reports, spreadsheets, end to end
reports and as built drawings called for at the completion of job.
3.5 THIRD PARTY VERIFICATION
A. Owner’s representative shall be invited to witness field testing. The representative
shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase 5 business days before testing
commences.
B. Owner’s representative may select a random sample of 1% of the installed links. The
representative (or his authorized delegate) shall test these randomly selected links and
the results are to be stored as called for in this section. The results obtained shall be
compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the
sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor
under supervision of the Owner’s representative shall repeat 100% testing and the cost
shall be borne by the installation contractor.
3.6 TEST DOCUMENTATION
A. Provide test report documentation in a hard copy summary report, by TR, in a three-
ring binder, within 1 week prior to cutover of any phase of the project. Provide full
plot data for any failures and any marginal passes and place yellow posted note affixed
to each related printed page of the binder for review with Owner. Correct any
deficiencies as direct by the Owner.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 19 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
B. The three-ring binder shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover and spine with
the words “Test Results”, the project name, building name, Cornell assigned facility
code number, the date of completion (month and year) and the Contractors name and
address. A tab shall be provided for each TR and the test results organized by TR.
The test reports in each TR tabbed section shall be sorted (before printing) by Patch
Panel and port for each TR.
C. Provide two CD’s with summary report, full plot data, test report within 1 week after
the completion of the project. The disks shall placed into CD sleeves and placed into
a three-ring binder clearly marked on the outside front cover and spine with the words
“Test Results”, the project name, building name, Cornell assigned facility code
number the date of completion (month and year) and the Contractors name and
address. The electronic test results shall be sorted by TR into proper folders to match
the heading of tabs in the tree ring binders. Also include in the binder, the summary
information provided in A. above and the full plot data for any previous failures or
marginal passes that have been corrected – with an explanation of the corrective action
and the signature of the technician and the foreman.
D. The binder and electronic folder/files shall divided by major heading tabs (or in the
case of electronic files, be placed into a folders structure similar to the hardcopy tests
of this section).
E. Major heading tabs (folders) shall be divided into Horizontal and Backbone (both
fiber and copper backbone). Each shall be further sectioned by test type and by TR
and rack as applicable.
F. For copper backbone, test all terminated, spliced, relocated or transferred pairs – two
weeks before intended cutover. Test all pairs, end-to-end and record hand written
results on the test sheet provided on the last page of this section. Coordinate access to
the Central Office end of the backbone cable for end-to-end testing, as required, 1
week in advance with the CIT project manager. Correct deficiencies as directed by
Owner and provide a minimum of 99% good pairs, for backbone cables.\
G. Provide updated cable schedules with all deviations, including all change order, field
authorizations, moves, adds and changes. Include all cable ID changes, panel and port
changes in each TR, room number changes, etc.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION & RECORDS
A. Confirm specific labeling requirements with customer’s project manager prior
cable installation or termination, even if detailed in the T4 drawings.
1. Pathways
(a) Coordinate and identify all communication pullboxes
per 27 05 28.
2. TR Rooms and Equipment Spaces
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 20 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
(a) Coordinate and identify all communication racks and
cabinet using a Letter designation (A,B,C etc.) as
called on the T3 plans.
(b) Coordinate and identify all communication patch
panels using a Letter designation (A,B,C etc.) as
called on the T3 plans and the cable schedules or as
directed by the Owner
(c) Coordinate and identify all voice patch panels using
descriptor as designated by the Owner. These
typically involved designators such as VPP-A, etc.
3. Cables
(a) Label cables using the conventions identified in the
cable schedules. The contractor shall review all
labeling requirements before cable rough-in begins.
(b) Provide written records in computer generated, table
format for all cables, with the as-built drawings.
(c) Update or generate cable schedules for all cable
installed.
(d) Update T2 drawings to reflect all field modifications
and change orders.
4. Optical Fiber
(a) Provide laser printed label for each fiber cable at the
BDF, as directed by Owner.
(b) The label shall be identical at both ends.
5. Station Outlets
(a) Provide TIA 606-A compliant insert with clear
plastic label cover on faceplates. Orient label and text
per horizontal or vertical plate orientation and
provide the maximum font size allowable. Align
cable ID with specific modular jack and provide
maximum fonts sizes and spacing between ID’s on
the same label to provide desired alignment.
(b) Provide a machine generated, preferably a laser
printed, label in the insert.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 21 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
(c) Labels shall match the cable identifier called for on
the drawings, cable schedules and as depicted in the
detail faceplate and outlet drawings.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 22 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
Project Site: __________________________________
1.1 BACKBONE COOPER CABLE TEST RECORD
Date of test: ________________ Project Manager:
_________________________
Cable Number:________Cable
Count:_______From:_____________________To:____________________
Tested From:__________________________Tested To:____________________________(end
locations)
Testing
Company:______________________________Technician:_____________________________
Splicing Company:_____________________________Cable Placement
Company:__________________________
BACKBONE CABLING
Pair
Color Pair #
Test
Results
Pair
# Test Results Pair # Test Results
Pair
# Test Results
BL-W ______01 26 51 76
O-W 2 27 52 77
GR-W 3 28 53 78
BR-W 4 29 54 79
SL-W 5 30 55 80
BL-R 6 31 56 81
O-R 7 32 57 82
GR-R 8 33 58 83
BR-R 9 34 59 84
SL-R 10 35 60 85
BL-BK 11 36 61 86
O-BK 12 37 62 87
GR-BK 13 38 63 88
BR-BK 14 39 64 89
SL-BK 15 40 65 90
BL-Y 16 41 66 91
O-Y 17 42 67 92
GR-Y 18 43 68 93
BR-Y 19 44 69 94
SL-Y 20 45 70 95
BL-V 21 46 71 96
O-V 22 47 72 97
GR-V 23 48 73 98
BR-V 24 49 74 99
SL-V 25 50 75 _____00
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TESTING<IDENTIFICATION & ADMINISTRATION
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 05 53 – PAGE 23 OF 23
MARCH 29, 2013
`
END OF SECTION
TEST RESULTS – Abbreviations to use in the columns above:
1) Pair is Good = OK 5) Tip Ground =T.G.
2) Ring Side Open =R.S.O. 6) Shorted Pair =S.P.
3) Tip Side Open =T.S.O. 7) Split Pair=SPL (ex. For tip side of #5 and #17 =T.of#5w/T. of #17
4) Ring Ground =R.G. 8) Reverse Sides =REV
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 1 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 27 11 00
TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the
complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents.
B. This section includes the minimum requirements for equipment and cable
installations in telecommunication rooms (TRs). The following equipment
is described in this section:
1. Floor Mounted Racks
2. Equipment Shelves
3. Cable Management
4. Fiber Patch Panels
5. Patch Panels
6. Termination Blocks
7. Cable Runway
8. Cable Supports
9. Grounding and Bonding
10. Hook and Loop Wraps
11. Power Strips
12. Firestop
13. PVC-25 pair rack interconnect cable
C. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict,
then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are
believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The
Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most
recent release when developing the proposal for installation.
D. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The
contractor must be aware of local codes that may impact this project.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 2 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All equipment rooms shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated
in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and approval of
the Owners representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the
quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based on
the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal” is stated,
equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment
specified, and subject to approval.
B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable
requirements of:
1. ANSI/TIA-568-C
2. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006
3. ANSI/TIA-569-B
4. ANSI/TIA-606-A
5. ANSI/TIA-607-B
6. Underwriters Laboratory
7. Federal Communications Commission
8. NFPA 70 – 2002
9. BICSI “Telecommunications Distribution Method Manual”, current
edition.
10. NEMA-250
11. EIA 310-D
12. Section 26 05 26.
1.3 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data for the following, ONLY if deviating from the exact
design make/part number or if a specific part number is not provided in the
contract documents.
1. Floor Mounted Racks
2. Cable Management
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 3 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Fiber Patch Panels
4. Patch Panels
5. Termination Blocks
6. Cable Runway
7. Cable Supports
8. Grounding and Bonding
9. Hook and Loop Wraps
10. Power Strips
11. Firestop
12. PVC-25 pair rack interconnect cable
B. Provide sample faceplate(s) of every style of faceplate planned for this
project, in the colors as called for.
C. Provide sample surface mounted outlet box(s) planned for this project, to
confirm proper mounting and radius control. Coordinate with Division 26.
D. `Provide sample labeling from handheld printers owner by contractor or
intended to be used on this project, with labels as detailed on the
drawings, specified in the cable schedules for each different type of
faceplate to be used. Also provide labels for each style patch panel to be
used, as detailed on the drawings, specified in the cable schedules for
each different type of patch panel to be used (48 port UTP, 24 port UTP,
and fiber patch panels)
E. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS
A. Racks shall meet the following physical specifications:
1. 19” rack mounting space.
2. 7 foot high.
3. Aluminum construction, factory paint black in color.
4. 15” deep base with four (4) ¾” bolt down holes.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 4 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Rack shall have double sided 12/24 tapped holes and 5/8”,5/8”, ½”
standard EIA hole pattern.
C. Design Make: Chatsworth Products Inc., black
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Panduit
2. B-Line
3. Others as approved by Owner
2.2 CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Provide rack mounted horizontal and vertical cable management for all
horizontal, backbone and patch cables.
B. Panels shall have front and back channels with hinged covers.
C. Cable management panels shall be plastic and have integral wire retaining
fingers, radius fingers for maintaining proper bend radius for Category 6
and optical fiber cables.
D. Management panels shall mount to any standard 19” rack and include all
required mounting brackets and screws.
E. Provide 2RU horizontal cable managers, in both open and closed
configurations, as called for on the T3 drawings.
F. Provide vertical cable manager as shown on the T3 drawings. Provide
end panel cap for vertical cable manager furthest from the wall.
G. Design Makes:
1. Vertical - Panduit WMPVHC45E, in black, as called for on the T3
drawings. Size: 7'H X 6"W X 13.8"D FRONT/REAR with covers.
2. Vertical - Panduit PRV8, 10 PATCHRUNNER Series, in black, as
called for on the T3 drawings. FRONT/REAR.
3. Vertical - Panduit PRSHD8, 10 PATCHRUNNER single metal door,
for each PRV Patchrunner, called for on the T3 drawings. Use *”
wide version when 2 horizontal racks are side by side.
4. Horizontal Closed Cable Manager - Panduit WMPH2E Series,
supplied with removable covers. Two rack units (2RU) in height
typical, as called for on the T3 drawings.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 5 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
5. Horizontal Open Cable Manager - Panduit CMPHH2 Series, 3”x5”
front only D-ring style, 2RU in height typical, as called for on the T3
drawings.
2.3 FIBER PATCH PANEL
A. Shall be rack mounted as called for on the T3 Series rack elevations,
program standard detail drawings and T1-FL Series fiber logical riser
drawings.
B. Shall be constructed with 16 gauge steel.
C. Provide adapter panels with duplex SC couplers, mounted in housing, for
all fiber cables installed.
D. Rack mounted housings shall have splice organizer drawers that are
removable or held open at 30 degree angle and translucent latching
hinged front cover, as called for.
E. Wall mounted housings shall have a lockable hinged door enclosing the
cable loop and termination section and a latchable hinged door enclosing
the connector section of the housing.
F. Organizer drawers and wall mount cabinets shall come complete with
routing rings for cable management and cable tie-down bars for support of
main cable.
G. Shall accommodate 48, 72 or 96 fibers as called for on the T3 drawing
rack elevations and drawings.
1. Design make: Design makes:
a) Corning Cable Systems Closet Connector Housings #CCH-
04U and #CCH-02U and PCH-01U Series as called for on
drawings: T1-FL,T3 and program standard detail drawings.
b) Corning Cable Systems 12-Fiber SC Duplex Panels for
Multi-Mode strands #CCH-CP12-91 and blank filler panels
for unused spaces.
c) Corning Cable Systems 12-Fiber SC Duplex Panels for
Single-Mode strands #CCH-CP12-59 and blank filler panels
for unused spaces.
2.4 PATCH PANELS
A. Patch Panels, for Category 6/6A connectivity
1. Physical Characteristics
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 6 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
a) Panels shall be made of 16ga cold rolled steel with a black
powder coat finish in 24, 48, and 96 port configurations.
b) Panels shall accommodate a minimum of 24 ports for each
rack mount space (1rms = 44.5 mm [1.75 in.]).
c) Panels shall be manufactured with a rolled-edge at the top
and bottom for stiffness.
d) Panels shall accept Panduit Mini-Com modules for UTP,
Optical Fiber, Audio and Video connectivity, which snap in
and out for easy moves, adds and changes without re-
termination of the cabling. Panels shall allow front access to
installed modules.
e) Panels shall mount to standard EIA 19” or 23” racks (with
optional extender brackets.
f) 48 port panels shall be supplied with 8 factory installed
CFPLM6BL snap-in faceplates that readily accept TX6 Mini-
Com jack modules.
g) Panels shall have port identification capability (Machine
generated) on both the front and rear of the panel. Front
port identification on the 48 port panels shall be located
between the rows of jacks.
h) Panels shall terminate and arrange for modules in group of
four (4).
i) Panels shall feature vertical panel ID label holders.
j) Labeling options to include laser printable paper and
adhesive labels.
k) Design Makes:
1) Mini-Com M6 Style Modular Faceplate Patch Panel -
Panduit # CPPL48WBLY.
2) Mini-Com M6 Style Modular Angled Faceplate Patch
Panel - Panduit # CPPLA48WBLY.
3) Acceptable Manufacturers: Others as approved only
by Owner.
B. Category 5e Voice Patch Panels
1. Physical Characteristics
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 7 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
a) Shall exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 5e and ISO11801
Class D standards
b) Each port shall be 100% tested to ensure NEXT and return
loss performance and is individually serialized to support
traceability
c) Shall utilize 110 termination on back panel
d) Each port contains a label that is color coded for Universal
T568A/T568B wiring scheme.
e) Terminates 4 pair, 22 - 24 AWG, 100 ohm, solid or stranded
twisted pair cable
f) Mount to standard EIA 19" rack.
g) Write-on areas for port and panel identification available
h) Can be clearly identified with labels and icons
i) Design Makes:
1) Panduit # NK5EEP48P, 48-port 2RU panels, per T3
drawing, used with 1-pair connections, per RJ-45 port.
2) Acceptable Manufacturers: Others as approved only
by Owner.
3) Panduit # NK5EPP24P, 24-port 1RU panel, per T3
drawing, used with 4-pair terminations/connections,
per RJ-45 port.
4) Acceptable Manufacturers: Others as approved only
by Owner.
2.5 TERMINATION BLOCKS
A. Provide 110-300 pair wall mounted termination blocks as called for on T3
detail drawings.
B. Provide 110-100 pair wall mounted termination blocks as called for on T3
detail drawings for wall terminate fire alarm cables.
C. Provide color coded designation strips, and clear covers for all blocks per
the Owner’s direction.
D. Provide distribution ring backboard between blocks as per detail drawings.
E. Design Makes:
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 8 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Systimax #110AW2-100 Wiring block with legs
2. Systimax #110AW2-300 Wiring block with legs
3. Systimax #110C-5, 5-pair clips, for all backbone copper risers
4. Systimax #188B1 metal backboard with distribution rings
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Others as approved only by Owner.
2.6 CABLE RUNWAY
A. Provide horizontal cable runway from wall to rack for horizontal cable
support.
B. Provide vertical cable runway from all sleeves, conduits and cable trays to
the equipment racks for horizontal and backbone cable support inside the
Telecommunication Room (TR).
C. Cable runways shall have hollow side bars nominally 3/8” thick by 1 ½ “
H with rungs 9” on center to all TR’s.
D. Provide connecting hardware to suit installation and provide a first class
installation. This shall include, but not be limited to, standard rack-to-
runways mounting plate for each 19” rack, wall angle support brackets,
junction kits in various vertical and horizontal configurations, reducing
fittings, radius fitting and cable drop outs, grounding kits, bonding kits, etc.
E. Include all hardware for securing trays to each other, to the rack and to the
wall
F. Supply optional cable retaining posts per Section 3.4 of this section or
called for on the T3 drawings. Chatsworth 11252-7xx series.
G. Provide cable radius fittings as shown and called for on the T3 drawings.
H. Provide one-tier or two-tier cable runways system, per T3 drawings.
I. Provide cable drop out (waterfall) fittings as shown and called for on the
T3 drawings, that are the next size smaller in width than the cable
runways they are fastened to. (i.e 12” waterfall for 18” cable runway).
J. Design make: Chatsworth Telco-Style Cable Runway System – hollow
side bar for all TR’s.
K. Acceptable manufacturers, only as approved in advance by Owner
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 9 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
1. B-Line
2. Homaco
3. Newton Instrument Company
2.7 BACK BOARDS
A. Provided by General Contractor and the installation coordinated by
Division 26 and 27 contractors.
B. Refer to additional Division 1 requirements, A3-Series drawings and T3-
Series drawings.
2.8 CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Velcro-type Hooks and Loop Wraps
1. Refer to Section 27 15 00 section 3.1 for additional requirements.
B. Metal backboards for 110-Style Blocks
1. Provide systimax “D” ring metal backboards between 110 style
blocks as shown on the drawings or as called for.
2. Design Make: systimax 188B backboard.
C. Two-Hole straps for high pair count copper cables and innerducts
1. Refer to Section 27 13 00 requirements and design makes and
installation requirements.
D. Distribution rings for plywood backboard cable routing
1. Provide wall mounted “D” rings for wall mounted vertical and
horizontal cable management as shown on the drawings or as
called for.
2. Design Make: Senior Industries -SI-4754 - cross connect wiring, SI-
4755 Vertical and Horizontal Category 6 cable.
3. Acceptable manufacturers:
a) Allen Tel
b) Gardner Bender
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 10 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
2.9 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Provide standards compliant and code compliant Telecommunications
Bonding Backbone (TBB). This backbone shall be used to ground all
telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways,
and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a current
carrying conductor.
B. Provide standards compliant and code compliant telecommunications
main grounding bus bar (TMGB). The main entrance facility/equipment
room in each building shall be equipped with a telecommunications main
grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room shall be
provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB
shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility.
The intent of this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in
potential to the building electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop
current potential is minimized between telecommunications equipment
and the electrical system to which it is attached.
C. The Contractor shall bond all racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths,
metallic strength members, splice cases, cable trays, ladder runways,
metallic conduits, metallic raceways, lightning protectors, etc. entering or
residing in the TR room(s) to the respective TGB or TMGB using a
minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and two hole
compression connectors with ANSI compliant hole pattern.
D. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be
identified with a green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at
each termination point with a wrap of green tape. All cables and busbars
shall be identified and labeled in accordance drawing details, ANSI/TIA-
607-B, Section 27 05 00 and the Cornell University Design and
Construction Standards.
E. Provide one 19” grounding bus Bar for each equipment rack in each TR,
even if not specifically called for on the drawings. The T3 drawings
typically identify the equipment on the rack elevation drawing (typically
Rack 1 and possibly Rack 3).
F. Use paint piercing screws and/or washers at racks on all finished surfaces
(vertical racks, ladder racking etc)
G. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building
service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical
contractor.
H. Refer to E4 Grounding Riser Drawing, E4 TGB details, T3-series drawings
AT Standard Detail 27 05 26 01-02 and specification section 27 05 00 for
additional information.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 11 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
I. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building
service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical
contractor.
J. Contractor shall coordinate the exact positioning of the TGB in each
Telecommunication Room with the T3-Series drawings, the Owner and
the Division 26 contractor, in the field in advance.
2.10 POWER STRIPS
A. Shall meet U.L. 1363 and 1449 requirements.
B. Provide two horizontal rack mount powerstrips for each Equipment Rack
in each TR, even if not specifically called for on the drawings. The T3
drawings typically identify the equipment on the rack elevation drawing
(typically Rack 1 and possibly Rack 3).
C. Provide transformer spacing in 1RU height with a minimum of six (6)
20Amp NEMA 5-20R standard 20A, 125VAC receptacles. Each power
strip shall be equipped with a minimum 15’ long plug ended cord -
125VAC, 20Amp, single phase, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, NEMA 5-20P
cord and standard plug.
D. Each power strip shall be provided with optional surge suppression to
block excessive voltage rated at 600V with UL1449 rating.
E. Maximum Surge Current: 36,000 Amps (12,000 Amps L-N, 12,000 Amps
L-G, 12,000 Amps N-G)
F. Integral Protection indication to show the status of the unit.
G. Do not provide toggle switch that can accidentally get bumped off, unless
it has a switch guard over the switch.
1. Design Make: Wiremold R5BZ20-15, or approved equal.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Chatsworth
2. SGL Waber / Tripp Lite
3. Middle Atlantic Products
2.11 FLOOR MOUNT CABINET
A. Floor mount cabinets shall meet the following physical specifications:
1. 19” equipment mounting section and hinged locking front door.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 12 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
2. 2500 lb weight capacity
3. Adjustable 19” mounting rails
4. Vented locking rear door
5. Solid locking front door
6. Overall dimensions - Hx22”Wx25”D
7. Height as shown on T3 drawings
8. Heavy steel construction, factory paint black in color.
B. Design Make Middle Atlantic ERK-19-xxxx-AV series
2.12 WALL MOUNT CABINET
A. Wall mount cabinets shall meet the following physical specifications:
1. 3 section cabinets include wall mount section with conduit
knockouts, 19” equipment mounting section and hinged locking
front door.
2. 2500 lb weight capacity
3. Overall dimensions - Hx22”Wx26”D
4. 24” usable depth.
5. Height as shown on T3 drawings
6. Heavy steel construction, factory paint black in color.
B. Design Make Middle Atlantic DWR series
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 FLOOR MOUNTED RACKS
A. Coordinate rack positioning and mock-up with other trades. Refer to 27
05 00 Part 3 Mock-Up section for additional coordination requirements
B. All racks shall be anchored to the floor, with large heavy duty gauge
fender washers and four anchor bolts.
C. Provide vertical and horizontal cable management in the front and back.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 13 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
D. Mount rack a minimum of 36” from wall when orientated parallel to wall
and tight to wall (after allowing for vertical cable managers) when
perpendicular to wall. Coordinate rack placement with existing and
proposed conditions.
E. Ground the bottom of each rack to the TGB equipment ground bar with a
#6 green copper wire. Provide aggressive cutting Type-B internal/external
tooth lock washer. Torque properly to provide an acceptable bonded joint,
for each nut to cut primed and painted surfaces. Refer to American
Standard ASA B27.1-1965. These washers shall be used on all painted
equipment racks, cable ladders, cable tray in TR’s.
F. Coordinate with other utilities, trades and cable runway provisioning as
required. Layout, mock-up all racks and cable runways for Owner review,
alteration and approval before proceeding with any fabrication, especially
in the basement BDF.
G. Coordinate the relocation of existing equipment, power, conduits and
cabling as directed by Owner. Provide necessary provisions and
alterations to allow proper relocation without disruption of services. Refer
to T2 and T3 Series removal plans.
H. Alter, modify, or fabricate existing 19” equipment racks, shown for
relocation to properly fit into the BDF room as indicated. Coordinate
rework of existing service loops of fiber as directed by CIT. Coordinate
with other utilities, trades and cable runway provisioning as required.
3.2 CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Provide racked mounted 2RU (3.5”) open and closed horizontal cable
managers as shown.
B. Install vertical cable managers, at the ends of each rack and between the
racks, as shown on the T3 drawings. Provide closed end cap on exposed
vertical end panels and provide rear hinged door (both items are
accessories).
C. Provide at least one 2RU horizontal cable manager for each 24 port or 48
UTP port panel and fiber patch panel installed, even if not specifically
detailed on the drawings.
3.3 CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide “D” rings 2 ft. on center for all exposed vertical cable runs
terminated or routed exposed on the plywood backboards.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 14 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Keep horizontal wall mounted cable runs to a minimum. In general
horizontal runs shall be supported by overhead cable runway or overhead
ladder runway.
C. Provide cable brackets 4’ on center supported to building structure for all
cable runs above ceilings where cable tray is not called for.
D. Provide Velcro-type Hooks and Loop Wraps. Refer to Section 27 15 00
section 3.1 for additional requirements.
E. Provide vertically mount cable runways or channel, affixed to floor and
wall as applicable, where called for to support cables in a vertical plane.
Provide hook and loop cable wraps for such situations, on 18” centers.
3.4 CABLE RUNWAY
A. Install as shown on the drawings
B. Secure rack to walls and to the top of the equipment racks.
C. Provide elevated riser kits as called for on the T3 drawings.
D. Ground and bond all sections of runways.
E. Provide waterfalls and radius bends for proper cable routing and support,
even if not specifically detailed on the drawings.
F. When sleeves, conduits and cable tray enter a TR at a height of more than
2’ above the highest horizontal cable runways in a TR, provide wall
mounted vertical cable runways section up to meet each horizontal
pathway entering the TR and provide proper radius control and vertical
cable support and fastening with hook and loop fasteners as called for
elsewhere in this section.
G. Provide optional cable retaining posts, 6” in height minimum with rubber
end caps, that mount directly to cable runway side stringers, color to
match cable runway provided. Provide a minimum of twelve (12) per TR
room, even if not called out on the drawings and install per Owner’s
direction. Chatsworth 10596 series.
H. Ground the bottom of each rack to the TGB equipment ground bar with a
#6 green copper wire. Provide aggressive cutting Type-B internal/external
tooth lock washer. Torque properly to provide an acceptable bonded joint,
for each nut to cut primed and painted surfaces. Refer to American
Standard ASA B27.1-1965. These washers shall be used on all painted
equipment racks, cable ladders, cable tray in TR’s.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 15 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
I. Coordinate cable runway positioning and mock-up with other trades.
Refer to 27 05 00 Part 3 Mock-Up section for additional coordination
requirements.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide cable runway from overhead sleeve locations in closets to
equipment racks and punch down block locations, in both the horizontal
and vertical orientation so that cables can be supported on at least 2’
centers.
B. Provide reusable, hook and loop wrap strips as the primary means for
organizing all voice, data and coaxial cables station and patch cables in
TR’s. Refer to 27 15 00, section 3.1 for additional requirements.
C. All cables shall be neatly “dressed out” in equipment rooms. Cables to be
neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each
panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed
back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.
D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch
panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle
support ties. Cables labeled within a bundle, where the label is obscured
from view shall not be acceptable.
E. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding T568A
configuration, in all Category 6 UTP patch panels, BEFORE beginning to
terminate cables. Cables terminated onto a patch panel without said port
label strip shall not be acceptable.
F. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding T568B
configuration for all Category 5e voice interconnect patch panels,
BEFORE beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated onto a patch
panel without said port label strip shall not be acceptable
G. Fire Stop all sleeves and conduit openings at time or removal of existing
abandoned cables and again at time of cable installation, as called for.
3.6 WALL TERMINATION BLOCKS
A. Installed on plywood backboard so that top of block is 6’ AFF maximum.
B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125”).
C. Also refer to UTP backbone called termination and labeling requirements
in this section.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 16 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
D. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the
termination point.
E. DO NOT MOUNT WALL MOUNTED TERMINATION BLOCKS WITH
DRYWALL TYPE SCREWS.
F. Mount Blocks with steel, zinc plated 5/16" slotted hex head #10 x 3/4" drill
screws. Part #Metallics DS181 or equal.
3.7 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Provide pre-drilled tin plated copper bus bar, with standard NEMA bolt
hole sizing and spacing for connectors being used, in all
telecommunication rooms.
B. All connectors and clamps shall be mechanical type made of silicon
bronze.
C. Terminals shall be solderless compression type 2-hole lugs, copper long-
barrel NEMA two bolt, and compliant with program standard detail
drawings - TGB detail
D. Provide #6 AWG conductor from the bus bar to the electrical system
equipment ground.
E. Bond the ground bar in the main Telecommunication Equipment Room
(TR) to dedicated communications equipment electrical panelboard(s).
F. Bond metallic equipment racks and cabinets to the ground bar. Bond
racks in a bus or parallel configuration. Series connections are not
acceptable.
G. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the ground bar in communications
rooms and spaces.
H. Bond all backbone conduits and metallic raceways entering each TR to
the ground bar in each communications rooms.
I. Use an insulation-removal tool to remove the correct amount of jacket
from the wire, as determined by the size of the connector and the gauge of
the wire.
J. Use a compression tool equipped with a die that matches the compression
lug connector body, as recommended by the manufacturer. Leave
approximately 6mm (o.25 inches) of copper showing between the end of
the insulation on the wire and the end of the connector that the wire in
insert into.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 17 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
K. Ensure that a minimum bend radius of eight times the conductor outside
diameter is maintained where the wire changes direction.
3.8 PATCH PANELS.
A. Patch Panels – Category 6
1. Panels shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by
preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of
mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a
result of termination to the patch panel shall be no greater than 0.5
inches (13 mm)
2. Panels shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions
and properly mounted to a rack, cabinet, bracket or other
appropriate mounting device.
3. Panels shall be installed such that cables terminated to the panel
can maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable
diameter into the IDC contacts.
4. Cables shall be terminated on the panels such that there is no
tension on the conductors in the termination contacts.
a) Panels shall be properly labeled on front and back with the
cable number and port connections for each port, as per
cable schedule drawings.
5. All cables shall be neatly “dressed out” in equipment rooms.
Cables to be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels
or blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle
separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the
rack or frame.
6. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the
patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the
bundle support ties. Cables labeled within a bundle, where the
label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.
7. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding
T568A configuration, in all Category 6 UTP patch panels, BEFORE
beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated onto a patch
panel without said port label strip shall not be acceptable\
8. Install factory supplied patch panel labels, in the corresponding
T568B configuration for all Category 5e VOICE interconnect patch
panels, BEFORE beginning to terminate cables. Cables terminated
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 18 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
onto a patch panel without said port label strip shall not be
acceptable
9. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125”).
10. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the
termination point.
11. Terminate all Category 6 patch panels with wiring scheme T568A
12. Terminate all Category 5e voice interconnect patch panels with
wiring scheme T568B. Terminate 1 pair per port except for the last
6 ports in a patch panel which should be terminated 4 pairs per
port.(Reference CU standard detail 27 13 43 01 for further
information).
3.9 CLEANING
A. Pre-acceptance cleaning
1. In all TR spaces - a through sweeping, vacuuming, and wet
mopping/sponging shall be preformed, on a daily basis or less
frequently as directed by Owner. Cleaning shall include floors,
rafters, floor joists, exposed structural members, walls, ladder trays,
tops of cabinets/racks, existing/new passive and active
components, per manufacturer recommendations.
2. All non-metallic cable managers and snap covers shall be wiped
clean, both inside and outside of front, including rear channels. All
clear covers and doors shall be cleaned, both front and rear per
manufacturer recommendations.
3. All non-metallic cable managers and snap covers shall be wiped
clean, both inside and outside of front, including rear channels. All
clear covers and doors shall be cleaned, both front and rear per
manufacturer recommendations.
4. Inside of fiber optic enclosure and patch panels shall be blown
clean of settled dust. Said cleaning shall be performed for all new
construction projects or where gypsum sanding has been
performed.
5. All scraps, boxes, spools, pull-line and trash shall be removed and
properly disposed of.
6. All residual cable lubricant shall be cleaned from floors and walls
with an appropriate degreaser.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS AND SPACES
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 11 00 – PAGE 19 OF 19
MARCH 29, 2013
END OF SECTION
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 1 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 27 13 00
BACKBONE CABLING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the
complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Backbone cabling includes copper and optical fiber cabling between the
Main Telecommunications Room (MTR) and subsequent Intermediate
Telecommunications rooms (ITR’s).
B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
1. Inside Plant (ISP)
a) Optical Fiber Cable
b) Innerducts
c) Split Innerducts
d) Optical Fiber Connectors
e) Optical fiber splices
f) Shielded UTP Copper Cable
g) Clamps
h) Bonding Braid
i) Shield Bond Connectors
j) Splicing Modules
k) Splicing Tapes
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All
methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in
the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the
Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality
and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 2 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated,
equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment
specified and subject to approval.
B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable
requirements of:
1. ANSI/TIA – 568-C
2. ANSI/TIA – 569-B
3. NFPA 70 - 2002
4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current
edition
5. FCC 47 CFR 68
6. NEMA - 250
7. NEC - Articles 725,760, 770 and 800
8. IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code (2002)
9. ISO/IEC 11801
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA 607
11. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A (2002 or newer)
12. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568 (2006 edition)
C. The optical fiber cable plant shall be used to support Gigabit and 10-
Gaigbit Ethernet networks.
D. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict,
then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are
believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The
Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most
recent release when developing the proposal for installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions
for all cable, connecting hardware and patch cables.
B. Termination details for all cable types.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 3 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
C. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have
been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating
satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. (Include names and phone
numbers of references).
D. Cable Test Reports (at substantial completion).
E. Cable tension reports for optical fiber pulls backbone pulls over 200’and
any optical fiber installed in existing underground/under slab conduits, per
drawings T1-PL and T1-FL.
F. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GRADE OPTICAL FIBER CABLE FOR BUILDING BACKBONES
A. Cable shall be riser rated and meet the requirements Flame Test: UL 910
(NFPA 262-1994)
B. Fiber Characteristics
1. All fibers in the cable must be usable fibers and meet required
specifications.
2. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections
and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental
requirements of this specification.
3. Each optical fiber shall consist of a doped silica core surrounded by
a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad
design.
4. All optical fibers shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a
minimum of 100 kpsi.
5. The fiber shall be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective
coating. The coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding
surface.
6. The coated fiber shall have a layer of Teflon placed between the
dual layer acrylate coating of the optical fiber and the thermoplastic
buffer. The diameter of the thermoplastic buffer coating shall be
900 ± 50 mm.
7. The fiber coating and buffer shall be removable with commercially
available stripping tools in a single pass.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 4 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
C. The multimode fiber utilized in the cable specified herein shall meet
EIA/TIA-492AAAA-1989, "Detail Specification for 62.5 mm Core
Diameter/125 mm Cladding Diameter Class Ia Multimode, Graded Index
Optical Waveguide Fibers."
1. Core diameter: 62.5 ± 3.0 mm.
2. Cladding diameter: 125.0 ± 2.0 mm.
3. Core-to-Cladding Offset: £ 3.0 mm.
4. Cladding non-circularity: £ 2.0 %.
5. Core non-circularity: £ 6.0 %.
6. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10 mm
7. Graded index
8. Numerical Aperture: 0.275 ± 0.015.
9. Attenuation Uniformity: There shall be no point discontinuities
greater than 0.2 dB at either 850 nm or 1300 nm.
D. The non-dispersion shifted single-mode fiber utilized in the cable specified
herein shall conform to the following specifications:
1. Typical Core Diameter: 8.3 mm.
2. Cladding Diameter: 125.0 ± 1.0 mm.
3. Core-to-Cladding Offset: £ 0.6 mm.
4. Cladding Non-Circularity: £ 1.0%.
5. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10 mm.
6. Attenuation Uniformity- No point discontinuity greater than 0.1 dB at
either 1310 nm or 1550 nm.
7. Attenuation at the Water Peak- The attenuation at 1383 ± 3 nm
shall not exceed 2.1 dB/km.
8. Cutoff Wavelength- The cabled fiber cutoff wavelength shall be
< 1260 nm.
9. Mode Field Diameter: 9.30 ± 0.50 mm at 1310 nm
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 5 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
10. ± 1.00 mm at 1550 nm
11. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (lo)- 1301.5 nm £ lo £ 1321.5 nm.
12. Zero Dispersion Slope (So)- £ 0.092 ps/(nm²·km).
13. Fiber Curl: > 4.0 m radius of curvature.
E. Fiber Parameters
1. (Multimode only) The minimum normalized bandwidth of multimode
optical fibers shall be ³ 200z km at 850 nm and ³ 500 MHz km at
1300 nm.
2. (Single-mode) The maximum dispersion shall be £ 3.2 ps/(nm km)
from 1285 nm to 1330 nm and shall be < 18 ps/(nm km) at 1550
nm.
3. All fibers in the cable shall meet the requirements of this
specification.
4. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum attenuation for
each fiber at 23 ± 5°C.
5. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed
throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater
than 0.1 dB at 1310 nm/1550 nm (single-mode) or 0.2 dB at 850
nm/1300 nm (multimode) in any one kilometer length of fiber.
F. Physical Characteristics
1. Riser and Plenum Cables up to 24 Fibers:
a) The fibers may be stranded around a dielectric central
member and surrounded by layered aramid yarns. The
aramid yarns shall serve as the tensile strength member of
the cable.
b) A ripcord shall be applied between the aramid yarns and the
outer jacket to facilitate jacket removal.
c) The outer jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns for
physical and environmental protection.
2. Riser and Plenum Cables with 24 to 72 Fibers:
a) The buffered fibers shall be grouped in six fiber subunits. In
each subunit, the individual fibers shall be stranded around a
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 6 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
dielectric central member and surrounded by layered aramid
yarns.
b) A ripcord shall be incorporated in the subunit design to
facilitate access to the individual fibers.
c) The subunit jacket shall be extruded over the aramid yarns
for additional physical and environmental protection.
d) The subunits shall be stranded around a dielectric central
member.
e) A ripcord shall be inserted beneath the outer jacket to
facilitate jacket removal.
f) The outer jacket shall be extruded around the units for
physical and environmental protection.
3. Strength Members:
a) The strength member shall be a high modulus aramid yarn.
b) The aramid yarns shall be helically stranded around the
buffered fibers.
c) Non-toxic, non-irritant talc shall be applied to the yarn to
allow the yarns to be easily separated from the fibers and
the jacket.
4. Cable Jacket:
a) The jacket shall be continuous, free from pinholes, splits,
blisters, or other imperfections.
b) The jacket shall have a consistent, uniform thickness;
jackets extruded under high pressure are not acceptable.
c) The jacket shall be smooth, as is consistent with the best
commercial practice.
5. The jacket shall provide the cable with a tough, flexible, protective
coating, able to withstand the stresses expected in normal
installation and service.
6. The cable and subunit jacket color shall be orange for cables
containing multimode fibers. The cable and subunit jacket color
shall be yellow for cables containing single-mode fibers.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 7 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
7. For cables with more than two fibers, the cable jacket shall be
designed for easy removal without damage to the optical fibers by
incorporating a ripcord under each cable jacket. Non-toxic, non-
irritant talc shall be applied to the aramid yarns to allow the yarns to
be easily separated from the fibers and the jacket.
8. The nominal thickness of the cable outer jacket shall be sufficient to
provide adequate cable protection while meeting the mechanical,
flammability, and environmental test requirements of this document
over the life of the cable.
9. The cable shall be all-dielectric.
G. Identification
1. The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The
optical fiber color coding shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA-598,
"Color Coding of Fiber Optic Cables." The coloring material shall
be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be
susceptible to migration, and shall not affect the transmission
characteristics of the optical fibers. Color coded buffered fibers
shall not adhere to one another. When fibers are grouped into
individual units, each unit shall be numbered on the unit jacket for
identification. The number shall be repeated at regular intervals.
2. The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's
name or file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating,
listing mark, and sequential length markings every two feet. The
marking shall be in contrasting color to the cable jacket.
H. Additional Requirements
1. The storage temperature range for the cable on the original
shipping reel shall be -40°C to +70°C. The installation/operating
temperature range for plenum cables shall be 0°C to +70°C.
Testing shall be in accordance with FOTP-3.
2. Crush Resistance - The cable shall withstand a minimum
compressive load of 89 N/cm (50 lbf/in) applied uniformly over the
length of the compression plate. The cable shall be tested in
accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading Resistance of
Fiber Optic Cables." While under compressive load, the fibers shall
not experience an attenuation change greater than 0.4 dB at 1550
nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.6 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).
After the compressive load is removed, the fibers shall not
experience an attenuation change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm
(single-mode) or greater than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 8 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Impact Resistance - The cable shall withstand a minimum of 20
impact cycles. The cable shall be tested in accordance with FOTP-
25, "Repeated Impact Testing of Fiber Optic Cables and Cable
Assemblies." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation change
greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater than 0.4
dB at 1300 nm (multimode).
4. Cyclic Flexing - The cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing
cycles at a rate of 30 ± 1 cycles per minute. The cable shall be
tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic
Flexing Test." The fibers shall not experience an attenuation
change greater than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm (single-mode) or greater
than 0.4 dB at 1300 nm (multimode).
5. Flammability - All cables shall comply with the requirements of the
National Electrical CodeÒ (NECÒ), Article 770. Plenum cables
(OFNP) shall pass UL-910.
6. Design Make: Corning Cable Systems, MIC Riser Cable Series,
OFNR rated (or plenum if required by field conditions), standard or
hybrid make-up with 62.5/125 multimode and single mode as called
for on the T1-FL logical riser drawings, per below. Contractor shall
confirm these part number as correct and fully compliant to meeting
the requirements of the contract documents before ordering.
7. Corning MIC DX (non metallic armored) (orange jacket) Fiber with
similar characteristics may be used instead of MIC riser rated cable
and innerduct.
8. Indoor, OFNR Rated 12SM/6MM – Part # 018X81-331XX-24
9. Indoor, OFNR Rated 6SM - Part # 006E81-31131-24
2.2 INNER DUCT
A. Shall be constructed of a PVC Riser rated or plenum rated plastic as
required.
B. For riser installations, shall meet NEC 770-53 requirements.
C. Shall be .75 ”, 1" or 1.25" in diameter as called for on the drawings or as
directed by Owner.
D. Shall be white or orange in color.
E. Shall have a maximum flame rating of UL 910.
F. Not required if MIC DX non metallic armored fiber optic cable is used.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 9 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Design Make: Carlon DF4X1C (with pull rope)
H. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Endot
2. Dura-Line
3. Arnco
2.3 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE CONNECTORS
A. Backbone optical fiber connectors shall be duplex 568SC type.
B. The terminations shall comply with the following standards:
1. TIA/EIA-604-3 Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability
Standard, FOCIS-3 (Type SC)
2. EIA/TIA-4750000B Generic Specifications for Fiber Optic
Connectors
3. EIA/TIA-455-A Standard Test Procedures for Optical Fibers,
Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating
Devices, and Other Fiber Optic Components (FOTPs)
C. Connector Characteristics.
1. Strain relief: The connector shall provide a strain relief mechanism
for installation on a single fiber cable that contains strength
elements. The fiber within the body of the connector shall be
isolated mechanically from cable tension, bending and twisting.
2. The connector shall have an optical axial pull strength of 2.2 N at 0
degree angle and an optical off axial pull strength of 2.2 N at a 90
degree angle, with a maximum 0.5 dB increase in attenuation for
both tests when tested in accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-6B.
3. The maximum optical attenuation per each mated field installed
568SC connector pair shall not exceed 0.5 dB.
4. Shall have a return loss greater than or equal to 20 dB for
multimode fiber and greater than or equal to 26 dB for single mode fiber.
D. The connectors shall sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles without
degrading this performance.
E. Intermateability: The connector shall be designed in compliance with the
appropriate TIA FOCIS document.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 10 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
F. Installation rate: The connector shall be installable on 900 µm buffered
fiber in 1 minute or less total time.
G. Installation polishing: The connector shall not require polishing of
the endface in the field. Connectors shall have a factory-polished fiber
stub in the connector ferrule.
H. Installation type: The connector installation shall not require the use of
epoxies.
I. Fiber protection: The connector crimp-on mechanism shall protect the
bare fiber from the ingress of air or waterborne contaminants and shall
secure the fiber in the ferrule micro-hole.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 11 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
J. Performance Requirements.
Multimode Testing Max delta
change Final Measurement
FOTP-171
METHOD B1
METHOD B1
REQ.: <.75dB
N/A 0.11 dB TYP
0.19 dB MAX
FOTP 107 RETURN
LOSS
REQ.: <-20dB
N/A -42.5 dB TYP
-36.3 dB MIN
FOTP-2 IMPACT
8 DROPS/
1.5 M
N/A 0.14 dB IL
-41.3 dB RL
FOTP-1 FLEX
0.5 KG
N/A 0.18 dB IL
-41.3 dB RL
FOTP-36 TWIST
15 N AT 0 º
N/A 0.20 dB IL
-41.2 dB RL
FOTP-6 CABLE
RETENTION
66 N AT 0 º
0.06 dB 0.20 dB IL
-41.2 dB RL
FOTP-6 CABLE
RETENTION
19.4 N
AT 90 º
0.06 dB 0.19 dB IL
-41.2 dB RL
FOTP-185 COUPLING
MECH
33 N AT 0 º
N/A 0.13 dB IL
-41.5 dB RL
FOTP-21 DURABILITY
500 CYCLES
N/A dB IL
-36.3 dB RL
FOTP-4 TEMP LIFE
60ºC/
14 DAYS
0.01 dB 0.08 dB IL
-39.0 dB RL
FOTP-5 HUMIDITY
4 DAYS @ 95%
0.15 dB .09 dB IL
-38.9 dB RL
FOTP-188 LOW TEMP.
-10 ºC/4 DAYS
0.22 dB 0.13 dB IL
-42.3 dB RL
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 12 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
Single Mode Testing Max delta
change Final Measurement
FOTP-171
METHOD B1
INSERTION
LOSS
N/A dB TYP
0.52 dB MAX
FOTP 107 RETURN
LOSS
N/A -44.4 dB TYP
-36.2 dB MIN
FOTP-2 IMPACT
8 DROPS/
1.5 M
N/A dB IL
-40.6 dB RL
FOTP-1 FLEX
0.5 KG
N/A 0.40 dB IL
-40.1 dB RL
FOTP-36 TWIST
15 N AT 0 º
N/A 0.37 dB IL
-40.2 dB RL
FOTP-6 CABLE
RETENTION
66 N AT 90 º
0.20 dB 0.39 dB IL
-42.3 dB RL
FOTP-6 CABLE
RETENTION
19.4 N
AT 90 º
0.11 dB 0.34 dB IL
-43.2 dB RL
FOTP-185 COUPLING
MECH
33 N AT 0 º
N/A 0.37 dB IL
-45.0 dB RL
FOTP-21 DURA-
BILITY
500 CYCLES
N/A 0.35 dB IL
-40.5 dB RL
FOTP-4 TEMP LIFE
60ºC/
14 DAYS
0.24 dB 0.29 dB IL
-44.2 dB RL
FOTP-5 HUMIDITY
4 DAYS
@95%
0.10 dB 0.30 dB IL
-43.9 dB RL
FOTP-188 LOW
TEMP.
-10 ºC
0.18 dB 0.29 dB IL
-44.1 dB RL
K. Design Makes:
1. Multi-Mode, SC, Ceramic Tip, CamLite UniCamSeries Corning
Cable Systems - # 95-000-41
2. Single-Mode, SC, Ceramic Tip, CamLite UniCam Series Corning
Cable Systems - # 95-200-41
2.4 OPTICAL FIBER SPLICES
A. Splices are not allowed, unless called for on the drawings to tie-in to
existing backbone splice enclosures.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 13 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
B. Should fiber be broken during installation the entire run shall be replaced.
2.5 SHIELDED UTP COPPER CABLE (BETWEEN TRS)
A. Backbone copper cables shall consist of 24 AWG, groups of 25 pair
thermoplastic insulated copper conductors following the ANSI/ICEA S-80-
576 color code. The 25 pair groups shall be bound together and covered
by a protective sheath consisting of an overall thermoplastic jacket and
one layer of dielectric material applied over the core.
B. The cable shall be listed and marked for its use as required by article 800
of the current NEC code. Provide ARMM/CMR rated cable.
C. Backbone cables shall be used for telephone systems only and shall be
third party verified Category 3.
D. Transmission Characteristics:
1. The resistance of any conductor, measured in accordance with
ASTM D 4566 shall not exceed 9.38 ohms per 100m at 20 degrees
C.
2. The resistance unbalance between the two conductors of any pair
shall not exceed 5%.
3. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 6.6 nF per
100m.
4. The capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair shall not
exceed 330 pF per 100m.
5. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz
to 16 MHz.
6. The attenuation shall meet the requirements of the horizontal cable
specified in section 27 15 00.
7. The insulation between each conductor and the core shield shall be
capable of withstanding a minimum dc potential of 5 kV for 3
seconds.
8. The propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz should not exceed 5.7
ns/m.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 14 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
9. The Power Sum NEXT loss shall meet the following:
Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB)
0.150 53
0.772 43
1.0 41
4.0 32
8.0 27
10.0 26
16.0 23
E. Shall be of size indicated on the drawings.
F. Shall consist of a core of 24 AWG solid annealed copper conductors, color
coded in accordance with telephone industry standards.
G. Transmission Characteristics:
1. The nominal resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 27.3
ohms per 1000 feet at 20 degrees C.
2. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 15.7 nF per
1000 feet at 1 kHz.
3. The maximum attenuation at 1.0 MHz shall not exceed 6.8 dB per
1000 feet.
4. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz
to 16 MHz.
H. Conductors shall be twisted to form pairs. Cable having more that 25 pairs
shall be assembled in units, each individually identified by color coded unit
binders.
I. The core shall be covered with a plastic tape.
J. The core and tape shall be overlaid with a corrugated shield applied
longitudinally with overlap using the following materials:
1. .008 inch coated aluminum
2. .005 inch copper
3. Shall be bonded to outer jacket to form an ALVYN sheath.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 15 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
K. The outer jacket shall consist of a fire retardant sheath that meets NEC
low flame requirements.
L. Cable shall be suitable, listed and marked for use in a riser application.
(CMR)
M. Manufacturer’s cable code, pair size, manufacturing plant location, month
and year or manufacture shall be marked on cable every two feet.
N. Design Make: Essex xxxx024EAA (xxxx=number of pairs) size and
quantity indicated on the T1-CL and T3 drawings.
O. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. General Cable
2. Norcom / CDT - Belden
3. Superior / Essex
2.6 UNSHIELDED UTP COPPER CABLE (VPP TO WALL)
A. Backbone copper interconnect cables shall consist of 24 AWG, 25 pair
thermoplastic insulated copper conductors following the ANSI/ICEA S-80-
576 color code. The 25 pair group shall be bound together and covered
by a protective sheath consisting of an overall thermoplastic jacket and
one layer of dielectric material applied over the core.
B. The cable shall be listed and marked for its use as required by article 800
of the 2005 NEC. Provide CM rated cable for interconnect cables routed
within a TR, generally between the wall mounted termination field(s) and
the Rack mounted voice patch panels.
C. Backbone cables shall be used for telephone systems only and shall be
third party verified Category 3.
D. Transmission Characteristics:
1. The resistance of any conductor, measured in accordance with
ASTM D 4566 shall not exceed 9.38 ohms per 100m at 20 degrees
C.
2. The resistance unbalance between the two conductors of any pair
shall not exceed 5%.
3. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 6.6 nF per
100m.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 16 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
4. The capacitance unbalance to ground at 1 kHz of any pair shall not
exceed 330 pF per 100m.
5. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz
to 16 MHz.
6. The attenuation shall meet the requirements of the horizontal cable
specified in section 27 15 00.
7. The propagation delay of any pair at 10 MHz should not exceed 5.7
ns/m.
8. The Power Sum NEXT loss shall meet the following:
Frequency (MHz) NEXT loss (dB)
0.150 53
0.772 43
1.0 41
4.0 32
8.0 27
10.0 26
16.0 23
E. Shall be of size and quantity indicated on the drawings.
F. Shall consist of a core of 24 AWG solid annealed copper conductors, color
coded in accordance with telephone industry standards.
G. Transmission Characteristics:
1. The nominal resistance of any conductor shall not exceed 27.3
ohms per 1000 feet at 20 degrees C.
2. The mutual capacitance of any pair shall not exceed 15.7 nF per
1000 feet at 1 kHz.
3. The maximum attenuation at 1.0 MHz shall not exceed 6.8 dB per
1000 feet.
4. The characteristic impedance shall be 100 ohm +/- 15% from 1 kHz
to 16 MHz.
H. Conductors shall be twisted to form pairs.
I. Cable shall be suitable, listed and marked for general use (CM) per the
NEC code.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 17 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
J. Manufacturer’s cable code, pair size, manufacturing plant location, month
and year or manufacture shall be marked on cable every two feet.
K. Design Make: Mohawk -3NP25P24-GY PVC - jacketed 25-pair in size to
be used for backboard to voice patch panel interconnect cabling, in
quantities indicated on the T3 drawings.
L. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. General Cable
2. Norcom / CDT - Belden
3. Superior / Essex
2.7 SPLICING ENCLOSURES
A. Backbone copper closures shall consist of a black solid or split PVC
sleeve as indicated on the drawings.
B. Minimum inside diameter shall be a minimum of 9” diameter (127mm).
C. Minimum inside length shall be 26" (660mm).
D. Actual sizes shall be indicated on the drawings. Otherwise, closure to be
sized to accommodate the maximum number of cable pairs to be spliced
and the type of connector to be used for splicing.
E. Closure shall be flame retardant.
F. Closure shall be re-enterable.
G. When assembled with properly sized end caps, bushing, plugs and
clamps, the closure shall be air and water tight.
H. Design Make:
1. 3M KB Series or approved equal.
2.8 BONDING HARNESSES
A. Shall be used to ground the shields of the spliced cables.
B. Bonding harness shall be 14 AWG and sized according to closure.
C. Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines.
D. Design Make:
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 18 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
1. 3M or approved equal
2.9 SPLICING MODULES
A. Crimping process shall strip the installation from the wire and trim the
excess wire.
B. The module shall create a gas tight connection.
C. All modules shall have test entry ports on the front side of the module.
D. Straight splicing modules shall have a yellow cover and body top and the
base and body bottom shall be dark gold.
E. Pluggable/Bridge splicing modules shall have a transparent cover, the
body top and bottom shall be blue and the insulator shall be red.
F. Design Make:
1. Straight Splicing Modules - 3M # 4000-C
2. Pluggable/Bridge Splicing Modules – 3M # 4005-CBM/TR
3. 3M UY2 wire connectors may be used for small pair count splices,
pending owner approval.
2.10 SPLICING TAPES
A. Shall be all weather, Vinyl Plastic material.
B. Shall resist:
1. Water
2. Acids
3. Alkalies
C. Shall be flame retardant
D. Shall not be affected by sunlight.
E. Shall release smoothly in zero weather and will not ooze adhesive in hot
climates.
F. Design Make:
1. 3M Scotch 88T Series
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 19 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
2.11 BONDING CONNECTORS
A. Shall consist of a base and upper member, two securing nuts and a plastic
shoe to aid connector installation and protect the conductors.
B. Base and upper members shall be made of tin plated tempered brass,
slightly curved so as to exert a continuous spring form on sheath and
shield after clamping.
C. Design Make:
1. 3M Part # 4460 – S Shield Bond Connector for cables of greater
than 100 pair.
2. 3M Part # 4460 – D Shield Bond Connector for cables of less than
100 pair.
2.12 GROUNDING BRAID
A. Shall be a flat tin plated copper braid conductor.
B. Shall have eyelets at regular intervals.
C. Eyelets shall fit shield connector studs up to 6 mm (1/4") in diameter.
2.13 2.14 EXPANDABLE CONDUIT PLUGS
A. Seal all open underground and telecommunications conduits entering and
existing the building and the BDF.
B. For spare conduits, provide expandable conduit plugs with rope tie rings to
seal spare conduits and tie off any existing pull-string or existing pull-lines.
This shall include conduits for CIT cables and Verizon conduits.
C. Design Make: Osburn Associates, Condux International or approved
equal
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
1. General
a) Interior cable installed shall be in metallic conduit. Do not
install with UTP or coax cables.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 20 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
b) Interior cable installed in pass-through existing IDF closets,
shall be protected with metallic U-Guard. Refer to drawing
T1-PL and T1-FL for additional requirements. Temporary
float existing backbone cable and termination blocks from
plywood walls to allow order and straight installation of
backbone cables and U-Guard.
c) Maintain polarization for entire system as described in
ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A section 12.7.1.
d) Cable shall be continuous. Splices are not allowed.
2. Cable Pulling
a) Adhere to all manufacturers’ requirements regarding pulling
tension, allowable lubricants and bending radius.
b) Provide cable pullers designed to suit field conditions. (i.e.
horizontal vault pulls, vertical pulls and 45 degree pulls)
c) Use cable guides with aluminum adapters sized for the 1 ¼”
cells. Provide extensions, sheaves and adapters as required
by the installation conditions.
d) Use directional pulling swivels as conditions require.
e) Use Line Tension meter during cable pull to provide accurate
measurements of the force exerted on a cable as it is
installed. The meter shall have a programmable overload set
point with an audible and visual indication of an overload
condition. The meter shall have controls to disengage the
cable puller if an overload occurs. Provide chart recorded
documentation of the cable pull for the owner’s records.
f) Provide cable racks in manholes to support cable.
g) Provide a minimum 20 foot service loop at the BDF, TR and
IDF locations.
3.2 INNER DUCTS AND SPIRAL WRAPS
A. Innerduct shall be placed with entrance cable for fiber optic installations.
B. Innerduct shall be provided for all interior building optical fiber cables, in a
minimum of 1” diameter. Place innerduct inside EMT conduits that have
been provided. Place a spare pull-line in during installation of the
innerduct.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 21 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Support exposed innerduct in riser closets, TR’s, IDF’s and BDF’s on a
minimum 3’ centers with 2-hole straps on plywood backboards, or
supports approved by owner.
D. Support exposed innerduct in riser closets, TR’s, IDF’s and BDF’s on a
minimum 3’ centers with 1.5” wide hook and loop straps on ladder racks,
cable runways or on or in racks and cabinets.
E. Provide split innerduct or split spiral wrap on exposed cable sheaths at
racks, cabinets and fiber splice bays and patch panels. Also refer to
17110 for spriral wraps.
F. Provide split innerduct, larger than the outside diameter of solid innerduct
used, when fiber cable is exposed in riser closets, TR’s, EF’s, IDF’s,
BDF’s, pullboxes and maintenance holes. Fiber shall not be left exposed
when solid innerduct is not continuous.
G. Provide innerduct or split innerduct to conceal existing fiber that is called
for to remain or be relocated within TR’s and BDF’s as directed by Owner.
3.3 RACK INTERCONNECT CABLES
A. Review wall mount house cable block to modular patch panel
interconnection termination requirement in the field with Owner, for all
PVC-25 pair interconnect cables in the TR rooms, before rough-in of
cables. Provide ample cable slack for proper dressing of cables at
termination points.
B. DO NOT mix the Category 6 cables and the PVC-25 cable in the vertical
cable managers.
C. Terminate ONE pair on pins 4 and 5 of each RJ-45 modular on every 48-
port of the voice patch panels, as indicated on the T3 drawing.
D. Terminate FOUR pairs per each RJ-45 modular on the one 24-port of the
voice patch panel, as indicated on the T3 drawing.
E. Review wall mount house cable block to modular patch panel
interconnection termination requirement in the field with Owner, for all
PVC-25 pair interconnect cables in the TR rooms -- before rough-in of
backbone copper cables. Provide ample cable slack for proper dressing
of cables at termination points and provide shield bond connectors at all
cable sheath opening.
F. PVC-25 pair cable shall be routed between the wall 110-300 termination
block, onto the cable runways down to the 48-port and 24-port Category 3
RJ45 voice patch panels as called for.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 22 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Route PVC-25 cable down center void of between the two vertical cable
manager installed to create a separate channel for these cables. DO NOT
mix the Category 6 cables, patch cords or the PVC-25 cable in a common
vertical cable manager.
H. Test all terminated conductors at each RJ-45 port of each voice patch
panel.. Multi-pair cables shall be replaced if they contain more than 1%
bad pairs that can not be repaired via re-terminating. Use test sheet
provided in 27 05 53 for backbone copper test results. Provide test
results.
I. Neatly wrap the unused 25 pair slack around both ends of the PVC-25
jacket and do not cut the pair short.
J. Label, dress and bundle each cable with a cable number and the
corresponding patch panel number/port range at both ends, in a fashion
that the cable number is facing forward and readily seen and allow for the
25 pair slack wrap.
K. Neatly bundle and securely fasten PVC-25 pair cable along plywood
backboards on maximum 1’ centers.
L. Neatly bundle and securely fasten PVC-25 pair cable along cable runways
and vertical cable managers with hook-and-loop Velcro-type straps on
maximum 1’ centers.
3.4 SHIELDED UTP CABLE
A. UTP backbone cables shall be installed in conduit.
B. Placement of underground cables shall conform to REA 644 Cable
Standards.
C. Cables above drywall ceilings shall be installed in conduit. Cables in
exposed areas other than communications equipment rooms shall be
installed in conduit or surface raceway.
D. Do not install with optical fiber cable or any other cable type, unless
approved in advance by Owner.
E. Provide cable management as called for in section 27 11 00.
F. Label termination blocks and lightning protector bases with the pair counts
indicated on the T1-Series Copper Logical riser drawings.
G. For 66-styleblocks, label or stencil every fifth pair of each termination
block with the appropriate cable count and provide 5th pair identification
lines on block or designation strips.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 23 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
H. For 110-styleblocks, provide color code plastic designation strips/covers
with the appropriate cable count indicated on every row of the block.
Provide 5th pair identification lines on block or designation strips.
I. The contractor shall replace the cable if damaged during installation.
J. Test all riser cable pairs. Multi-pair cables shall be replaced if they contain
more than 1% bad pairs that can not be repaired via re-terminating. Use
test sheet provided in 27 05 53 for backbone copper test results. Provides
test results
K. 110-Cross connect label designation strips shall be color-coded as
directed by the Owner as follows:
Description Color
C.O. Circuits
PBX Circuits
Auxiliary Circuits Yellow
Wiring to Work Station White
Back Bone Riser Cable Blue
Tie Lines Yellow
L. Review splicing and termination requirements with Owner before rough-in
of backbone copper cables greater than 100 pairs. Provide ample cable
slack for proper dressing of cables at termination and splicing locations.
Do not cut backbone cable greater than 300 pairs before onsite approval
of means and methods with Owner.
M. Secure all ARMM cables to wall within 12" of all splice enclosures
N. Test, label and document as per section 27 05 53.
O. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution
cables
P. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum) shall be co-installed with all backbone
cables installed in a conduit.
Q. All backbone cables shall be securely fastened to the sidewall of the TR
on each floor.
R. Backbone cables spanning more than three floors shall be securely
attached at the top of the cable run with a wire mesh grip and on
alternating floors or as required by local codes.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 24 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
3.5 RISER CLOSURES
A. In vault environment or other horizontally installations support splice
closure or cable at both end racks or steps - Condux cable racks series
#83801-00 (14 hole or longer) and Condux cable steps series #83806 (4"
or longer).
B. In other horizontally installations support spliced cable at both ends of
splice enclosures with snug fitting 2-hole straps.
C. Provide mounting kindorf type channels to secure splice enclosures to
walls.
D. Secure all Riser closures to wall kindorf channels with heavy duty black ty-
wraps.
3.6 SPLICING
A. Fold back method of splicing is required for all new splices.
B. Ends of unused binder groups shall be staggered, cleared and
encapsulated in HYSOL Series CK capping kits.
C. Terminal counts shall be installed as per the drawings and may not be
split or multiplied.
D. Binder group and color code integrity shall be maintained.
E. Provide striped nylon cable ties and identify binder groups on both sides of
sheath opening and at all other sheath openings and at termination points.
F. The quantity of bad pairs per sheath of 100 pairs or more shall not exceed
1% of the total pair count.
G. Use 3M 4053 Cover Removal Tool to remove bases and covers.
H. Use 3M 4053-PM Separation Tool to separate 4005-DPM modules from
any other module.
I. All cable pairs shall be free of electrical opens, shorts (within and between
pairs), polarity reversals, transpositions, and the presence of AC voltage,
from the Telecommunication Rooms to the termination hardware at the
main crossconnect frame. All defects must be corrected.
3.7 SPLICING TAPES
A. Tape all entries to vault and riser closures to prevent water, insects or
rodents from entering splice enclosure.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 25 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
3.8 BONDING CONNECTORS
A. Install Bonding Connectors so as not to damage the conductors in the
cable.
3.9 GROUNDING BRAID
A. Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines.
3.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. The contractor shall provide a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone
(TBB). This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications
cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated
hardware that has the potential to act as a current carrying conductor.
The TBB shall be installed independent of the building's electrical and
building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the
recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-607-B
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard.
B. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be
equipped with a telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB).
Each telecommunications room shall be provided with a
telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be
connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent
of this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to
the building electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current
potential is minimized between telecommunications equipment and the
electrical system to which it is attached.
C. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members,
splice cases, backbone conduits, cable trays, cable runways, etc. entering
or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded by the Division 27 contractor
to the respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AW G stranded
copper bonding conductor and compression connectors.
D. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be
identified with a green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at
each termination point with a wrap of green tape. All cables and busbars
shall be identified and labeled in accordance E-Series drawing details, TIA
606A and Sections 16450 and 27 05 53.
E. Refer to 26 05 26, and E-Series drawings for additional requirements.
F. Coordinate work with the Division 26 Electrical contractor.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP BACKBONE CABLING
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 13 00 – PAGE 26 OF 26
MARCH 29, 2013
3.11 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. The TBB shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in
the state that the work is to be performed. The TBB shall adhere to the
recommendations of the TIA/EIA-607-B standard, and shall be installed in
accordance with best industry practice.
B. Installation and termination of the main bonding conductor to the building
service entrance ground shall be performed by a licensed electrical
contractor.
C. The Division 27 contractor shall bond all cable sheaths, racks, cabinets,
cable runways, backbone conduits, cable trays, etc. to the TGB provided
in each TR, IDF, BDF and MDF as called for.
D. Refer to 26 05 26, and E-Series drawings for additional requirements.
E. Coordinate work with the Division 26 Electrical contractor.
END OF SECTION
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 1 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 27 15 00
HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for the
complete installation of work called for in the Contract Documents.
Unless noted otherwise all work included in this section is included in
the data cable contract.
B. Prior to installation and as part of the contract, relocate any
device a distance of 6 feet in any direction at the request of the
owner, at no additional cost. This shall include all necessary
conduit, cable, raceways, painting and patching to accomplish
the modification. Also refer to Division 26.
C. Refer to Appendix A of the specifications for the Proposed Cable
Schedule.
D. Refer to section 27 05 00 section 1.2 for additional requirements as it
relates to removal of existing cables to free up space in existing
pathways intended for reuse for new Category 6 installations.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Horizontal cabling includes Category 6 UTP from the
Telecommunications Rooms (TR) to the outlets as shown on the plans
and called for in the cable schedules (refer to Appendix). The
horizontal cabling includes all horizontal cables, mechanically
terminated jacks/inserts and faceplates in the work area and the
mechanical termination in the TR.
B. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
1. Unshielded Twisted Pair Cable
2. Connecting Hardware
3. Cable Terminations
4. Faceplates
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All cable shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All
methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 2 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval
of the Owner's Representative. Equipment and materials shall be of
the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is
based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved
equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of
the equipment specified and subject to approval
B. Strictly adhere to all Category 6 (BICSI and TIA) and manufacturer
recommended installation practices when installing high performance
cabling.
C. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or
indicated in the Contract Documents shall be subject to the control and
approval of Cornell University.
D. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and Manufacturer
indicated.
E. Provide with the submittals, documentation from an independent
testing agency indicating that the complete assembly including cable
and termination hardware has been tested and meets the performance
criteria called for.
F. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable
requirements of:
1. ANSI/TIA – 568-C
2. ANSI/TIA – 569-B
3. ANSI/TIA – 606-A
4. ISO/IEC 11801– 2002 (or newer edition)
5. NFPA 70 – 2002 (or newer edition)
6. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual,
current edition
7. Cornell University Design and Construction Standards, current
Edition
8. National Electrical Installation Standards (ANSI/NECA/BICSI-
568, 2006)
9. FCC 47 CFR 68
10. NEMA - 250
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 3 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
11. NEC - Articles 770, 800,810.
12. ADA, Americans with Disabilities Act.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers catalog sheets, specifications and installation
instructions for all cable, connecting hardware and patch cords
B. Evidence of manufacturer’s certification to install and warrant Panduit
UTP, copper backbone and Corning optical fiber cables and housings.
C. Termination details for all cable types.
D. List of three (3) installations of equivalent or larger systems that have
been installed within the past two (2) years and have been operating
satisfactorily for a minimum of one year. (Include names and phone
numbers of references at the site of installation)
E. Cable Test Reports (prior to hardware/software installation).
F. Also refer to Section 27 05 00 Basic Communication Requirements
G. Also refer to Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 100 OHM UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Shall be Category 6A type cabling, compliant with the requirements of
the most current ANSI/TIA 568-C standard, for all wireless locations .
B. Shall be Category 6 type cable, compliant with the requirements of the
most current ANSI/TIA 568-C standard, for all other locations.
C. Shall be independently verified to comply with ANSI/TIA 568-C.2-1.
D. An ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer shall make the cable.
E. Cable shall be UL LISTED.
F. Physical Characteristics:
1. Shall meet applicable requirements of ANSI/ICEA-S-80-576 and
NEC.
2. Conductor shall be 23 AWG solid bare annealed copper.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 4 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Category 6A: Outer jacket color shall be green or as directed by
Owner.
4. Category 6: Outer jacket color shall be blue or as directed by
Owner.
5. Category marking shall be printed every one foot. Footage
indicators shall also be providing on jacket.
6. The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be .023 in.
maximum.
7. Shall consist of (4) 22-26 AWG twisted pairs.
8. Shall be suitable for the environment in which they are to be
installed.
9. The color coding of pairs shall be:
Pair 1 W-BL; BL
Pair 2 W-O; 0
Pair 3 W-G; G
Pair 4 W-BR; BR
10. The overall diameter of the cable shall be less than 0.250
inches.
11. The ultimate breaking strength measured in accordance with
ASTM D 4565 shall be 400 N minimum.
12. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1 inch at -20 degrees
Celsius without jacket or insulation cracking.
13. Cable shall be third party verified to meet ANSI/TIA 568-C.2-1,
Category 6 requirements.
G. Transmission Characteristics:
1. Cable shall be ANSI/TIA-568-C.2-1 and ISO/IEC 11801
category 6 compliant.
2. Attenuation shall be measured in accordance with TIA/EIA
568B.2-1 and shall be maximum of 19.8dB @ 100 MHz.
3. Cable shall exhibit positive PSACR above 250 MHz.
4. Cable shall be tested & characterized to 500 MHz.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 5 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
5. Cable shall be UL LISTED.
Cable shall exhibit a NEXT loss of at least the following:
Frequency MHz NEXT dB
1.0 78
4.0 69
10.0 63
16.0 60
20.0 58
31.25 55
62.5 51
100.0 48
200 44
250 42
a) Cable shall exhibit ELFEXT loss of at least the following:
Frequency MHz ELFEXT dB
1.0 75
4.0 63
10.0 55
16.0 51
20.0 49
31.25 45
62.5 39
100.0 35
200 29
250 27
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 6 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
b) Cable shall exhibit Attenuation loss of less than the
following:
Frequency MHz Attenuation dB
1.0 2.0
4.0 3.8
10.0 6.0
16.0 7.6
20.0 8.5
31.25 10.7
62.5 15.4
100.0 19.8
200 29.0
250 32.58
c) Cable shall exhibit a return loss according to the
following:
Frequency MHz Return Loss (dB)
1 20.0
4 23.0
10 25.0
16 25.0
20 25.0
31.25 23.6
32.5 21.5
100 20.1
200 18.0
250 17.3
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 7 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
H. Design Make:
1. CAT6 Riser Rated - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 1071E, 4-pair,
CMR Riser rated with blue jacket.
2. CAT6 Plenum - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 2071E, 4-pair, CMP
Plenum rated with blue jacket.
3. CAT6A Riser - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 1091B, 4-pair, CMR
Riser rated with green jacket.
4. CAT6A Plenum - CommScope/SYSTIMAX 2091B, 4-pair, CMP
Plenum rated with green jacket.
I. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berk Tek Lanmark 1000
2. Panduit GenSPEED 6000
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONNECTING HARDWARE - 100 OHM
UTP
A. Physical Characteristics
1. Each UTP cable will be terminated at the outlet with a Mini-Com
Executive Series 8 position 8 wire Category 6 or 6A RJ45
modular jack.
2. Jacks shall be 8 position un-keyed
3. The manufacturer shall have conducted performance testing at
the component level by a UL certified testing laboratory, and
include Active Live Channel Testing to insure manufacture and
performance quality.
4. Jack housings shall be high impact 94 V-0 rated thermoplastic
5. Jack modules shall have a temperature rating of -10 °C (14°F)
to 60°C (140 °F) in conformance with ANSI/TIA568-C
6. Jack modules shall be used in all work areas and shall exceed
the connector requirements of the ANSI/TIA Category 6 or 6A
standard.
7. Jack modules shall be 100% tested to ensure NEXT
performance.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 8 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
8. Jack modules shall be universal in design, including complying
with the intermateability standard IEC 60603-7 for backward
compatibility.
9. Category 6 modules shall have UL and CSA approval.
10. The modules shall be able to be re-terminated a minimum of 10
times.
11. The modules shall have ETL verified Category 6 performance
and ISO Class E performance (as defined in ISO/IEC 11801) in
both the basic and channel links. They shall be universal in
design, accepting six or eight-pair modular plugs without
damage to the outer module contacts.
12. Jack modules shall have a designation indicating Category 6 or
6A compliance. Jack module shall also have a date code and a
complete catalog number and abbreviated series numbers
indicated on each module.
13. Jacks shall utilize a paired punch down sequence. Cable pair
twists shall be maintained up to the IDC, terminating all
conductors adjacent to its pair mate to better maintain pair
characteristics designed by the cable manufacturer.
14. The module shall snap into all Mini-Com outlets and patch
panels.
15. Jacks shall terminate 22-26 AWG unshielded twisted pair cable,
stranded or solid conductors.
16. Jacks shall terminate insulated conductors with outside
diameters up to .050”
17. Jacks shall be compatible with single conductor 110 impact
termination tools.
18. Jacks shall include translucent wire termination/retention stuffer
cap, that holds terminated wires in place, provides positive
locking latch to proper conductor strain relief on the cable
jacket, and allow the conductors to be visually inspected in the
assembled housing can ensure cable twists can be maintained
to within 1/8” (3.18mm).
19. Jack modules shall be compatible with ANSI/TIA 606-A color
code labeling and each module shall include a label marked
with both T-568A and T-568B wiring schemes.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 9 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
20. The jack module shall include an identification to signify
Category 6, 330 MHz performance.
21. Meets FCC Part 68 Subpart F; contacts plated with 50
microinches of gold.
22. Jack modules shall be manufactured in the USA
B. Jack modules shall be UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.
C. Jack modules shall be made by an ISO 9002 Certified Manufacturer.
D. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel with a category 6
patch panel and category 6 patch cords, all from the same
manufacturer and designed to be installed together, along with a
qualified category 6 cable shall meet or exceed the channel
requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 10 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
E. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as
described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel NEXT
loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the
manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and
meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard.
Frequency NEXT
MHz dB
1.0 65.0
4.0 63.0
8.0 58.2
10.0 56.6
16.0 53.2
20.0 51.6
25.0 50.0
31.25 48.4
62.5 43.4
100.0 39.9
200.0 34.8
250.0 33.1
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 11 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
F. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as
described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel
PSNEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the
manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and
meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard.
Frequency PSNEXT
MHz DB
1.0 62.0
4.0 60.5
8.0 55.6
10.0 54.0
16.0 50.6
20.0 49.0
25.0 47.3
31.25 45.7
62.5 40.6
100.0 37.1
200.0 31.9
250.0 30.2
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 12 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
G. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as
described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel
Insertion Loss of not more than the following, and be fully compliant
with the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty
specified and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel
requirements of the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard.
Frequency Insertion
LOSS
MHz DB
1.0 2.1
4.0 4.0
8.0 5.7
10.0 6.3
16.0 8.0
20.0 9.0
25.0 10.1
31.25 11.4
62.5 16.5
100.0 21.3
200.0 31.5
250.0 35.9
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 13 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
H. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as
described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel
ELFEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with the
manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified and
meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the
ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard.
Frequency ELFEXT
MHz DB
1.0 63.3
4.0 51.2
8.0 45.2
10.0 43.3
16.0 39.2
20.0 37.2
25.0 35.3
31.25 33.4
62.5 27.3
100.0 23.3
200.0 17.2
250.0 15.3
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 14 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
I. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as
described in section d above, shall exhibit a worst pair channel
PSELFEXT loss of at least the following, and be fully compliant with
the manufacturer performance requirements for the warranty specified
and meets or exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of
the ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 Standard.
Frequency PSELFEXT
MHz DB
1.0 60.3
4.0 48.2
8.0 42.2
10.0 40.3
16.0 36.2
20.0 34.2
25.0 32.3
31.25 30.4
62.5 24.3
100.0 20.3
200.0 14.2
250.0 12.3
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 15 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
J. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel configured as
described in section d above, shall exhibit a channel return loss of at
least the following, and be fully compliant with the manufacturer
performance requirements for the warranty specified and meets or
exceed the permanent link and channel requirements of the ANSI/TIA-
568-C.1 Standard.
Frequency Return Loss
MHz DB
1.0 19.0
4.0 19.0
8.0 19.0
10.0 19.0
16.0 18.0
20.0 17.5
25.0 17.0
31.25 16.5
62.5 14.0
100.0 12.0
200.0 9.0
250.0 8.0
K. Jack modules installed in a 4-connector channel shall exhibit a delay
skew of not more than 50 ns/100 m between 1 and 250 MHz.
L. Modular Jack Design Make:
1. CAT6 - Panduit Mini-Com TX6 Plus Jack Module TP Series,
Electric Ivory (or color to match existing conditions or as called
for -- Panduit # CJ688TPEI Series. Confirm wiring scheme with
Owner for all Category 6 terminations.
2. CAT6A - Panduit Mini-Com TX6A Plus Jack Module TP Series,
Electric Ivory (or color to match existing conditions or as called
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 16 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
for -- Panduit # CJ688TGEI Series. Confirm wiring scheme with
Owner for all Category 6 terminations.
2.3 FACEPLATE DESIGN MAKES AND OPTIONS
A. Double Gang – Panduit CBEEI-2G Minicom executive series, 8
module, Ivory
B. Single Gang Vertical – series. Panduit # CBEE1
C. Box/Surface Mount, 2 module Panduit # CBXJ2EI-A
D. Bezel Insert Sloped 2 Module Space Ivory Panduit # CHS2EI-X (10pk)
E. Bezel Insert Flat Blank 2 Module Wide Ivory Panduit # CHB2EI-X
F. Single Gang Horizontal four port – Panduit #CFPHSL4EI series 12
Port MUTOA – Panduit #CBXF12EI-AYRefer to requirements on
program standard detail drawings for recessed, surface boxes and
surface raceway outlet configurations and sloped bezel versus flat
bezel arrangements.
G. Blank plates matching existing plastic ivory communication faceplates
– to be provide by Telecommunication Contractor for all existing
unused flush backboxes and all surface raceway openings where
cable are removed under this contract.
2.4 WALL PHONE JACK ASSEMBLY
A. Shall be constructed of stainless steel
B. Shall have permanently affixed steel mounting studs designed to mate
with corresponding telephone base plate or adapter.
C. Shall mount to single gang outlet box, surface box or to wall directly.
D. Shall be wired to wiring scheme as directed by Owner.
E. Rated for CAT 6 including testing.
F. Shall be 8-position and 8-conductor.
G. Design Make: Panduit KWP6PYas approved by Owner.
H. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Suttle Appartus/CSI
2. Lucent/Avaya
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 17 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
3. CommScope/Systimax
2.5 PATCH CORDS, CATEGORY 6 – TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER
(CIT/NCS FIELD SERVICES GROUP).
2.6 TELEPHONE LINE CORDS – TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OW NER
(CIT/NCS FIELD SERVICES GROUP).
2.7 VOICE CROSS CONNECT AND FRAME WIRE – TO BE PROVIDED BY
THE OWNER (CIT/NCS FIELD SERVICES GROUP).
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. UTP Cable:
1. All exposed wiring shall be installed in surface metal raceway,
conduit, and enclosed cable tray, except within TR’s.
2. All wiring above ceilings shall be installed in cable tray, conduit,
raceway or limited use of j-Hooks as called for.
3. Shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by
preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of
mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a
result of termination shall be no greater than 0.5 inches (13
mm).
4. Shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Shall be installed such that cables can maintain minimum bend
radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter. Cables shall be
terminated in such a way that there is no tension on the
conductors in the termination contacts
6. Shall be installed in one continuous length unless specified in
the contract document.
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing all cables that
do not pass required bandwidth and throughput tests.
8. Maximum length shall be 90 meters, TR termination to WAO
termination.
9. Cable shall have no physical defects such as cuts, tears or
bulges in the outer jacket. Cables with defects shall be replaced.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 18 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
10. Install cable in neat and workmanlike manner. Neatly bundle,
support and tie all cable in closets, in both the vertical and
horizontal plane. Leave sufficient cable for 90o sweeps at all
vertical drops.
11. Provide reusable velcro-type hook and loop straps in each rear
vertical channel. Reusable straps shall be of varying sizes (each
allowing 50% spare future expansion) and of adequate quantity
to secure cable bundles at least every 4 rack units
12. Provide reusable velcro-type hook and loop straps in each
horizontal of overhead ladder rack/cable runway. Reusable
straps shall be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future
expansion) and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at
least every 3’ in straight runs and at least every 12” in radius
turns and waterfalls.
13. Provide reusable velcro-type hook and loop straps in each
vertical run of ladder rack/cable runway. Reusable straps shall
be of varying sizes (each allowing 50% spare future expansion)
and of adequate quantity to secure cable bundles at least every
12”.
14. Maintain the following clearances from EMI sources.
a) Power cable - 6 in.
b) Fluorescent Lights - 12 in.
c) Transformers - 36 in.
15. Adhere to TIA standard requirements regarding pulling tension
and allowable lubricants.
16. Do not install Category 6 or 6A cable with more than 110N (25
lbs) pull force, as specified in ANSI/TIA and BICSI TDDM
practices. Utilize appropriate cable lubricant in sufficient quantity
to reduce pulling friction to acceptable levels on: long pulls
inside conduit, pulls of multiple cables into a single small bore
conduit, on conduit runs greater than 100 lineal feet with bends
of opposing directions, and in conduit runs that exceed 180
degrees of accumulated bends. Use of tensile rated cords (i.e.
fishing line) should be used for difficult or questionable pulls - to
judge to go/no-go condition of the conduit and pulling setup.
17. Care must be taken so that the cable does not bend at any
location to a radius less than ten times the diameter of the
cable. A cable feeder guide or rollers of suitable dimensions
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 19 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
should be used between the cable reel and the face of the duct
to protect the cable and guide it into the duct as it is pulled off
the reel.
18. As the cable is pulled off the reel, it should be carefully watched
and inspected for sheath defects. If defects are noticed, the
pulling operation should be stopped immediately and the
Engineer promptly notified of the defect. Kinks and/or other
irregularities in the cable sheath should be removed or
corrected as directed by the engineer.
19. Cable jackets that are chaffed or burned exposing internal
conductor insulation or have bare conductors shall be replaced,
not spliced
20. Test, label and document as called for.
21. Firestop the interior of fire rated assembly openings where
sleeves, conduits, raceways, cable trays or cables are installed
through a fire barrier.
B. UTP MODULAR JACKS
1. All cables shall be terminated with modular jacks that snap into
a faceplate mounted on a wall outlet box, surface raceways or
power pole.
2. Outlet boxes shall be secured to building with mechanical
fasteners. Adhesive fasteners are not allowed.
3. Jacks shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by
preserving wire pair twists as close as possible to the point of
mechanical termination. The amount of untwisted in a pair as a
result of termination to the jack shall be no greater than 0.5
inches (13mm).
4. Jacks shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions
and properly mounted in plates, frames, housings or other
appropriate mounting device.
5. Jacks shall be installed such that cables terminated to the jacks
maintain minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable
diameter into the IDC contacts. Cables shall be terminated on
jacks such that there is no tension on the conductors in the
termination contacts.
6. All extra openings to be filled with blank inserts.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP HORIZONTAL REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 27 15 00 – PAGE 20 OF 20
MARCH 29, 2013
7. Terminate cable per EIA/TIA T-568B standard pin assignments.
C. FIRESTOPPING
1. Firestop all sleeves and conduit openings after each cable
installation are roughed-in and complete.
2. Never leave breaches in two and three hour rated assemblies
open for more than a 24 hour period.
3. Provide firestopping as called for in Section 07840 and Section
27 05 00
END OF SECTION
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 1 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 28 13 00
ACCESS CONTROL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This document includes a general description, functional requirements,
operational characteristics, and criteria for Card Access Equipment (CAE).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The Codes and Regulations listed below form a part of this specification to
the extent referenced. Work shall be performed in accordance with the
applicable international, federal, state, and local codes or standards
current at the commencement of installation. The following list
summarizes applicable standards:
1. UL 294, UL 1076, ULC
2. CE
3. FCC – Part 15, Part 68
4. NFPA 70, NEC
5. Microsoft® Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface)
6. ISO Software Coding Standards for C++ and C##
7. RoHS
B. Where more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent
shall apply.
1.3 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Security Management System (SMS) is outlined in section 28 07 10.
This section lists the equipment needed to obtain the card access
functionality of the SMS system.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. Manufacturer of the Card Access Equipment shall be an
established organization with referenced and documented
experience delivering and maintaining Security Management
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 2 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
Systems of equal or higher sophistication and complexity as
compared to the system detailed in this specification.
2. CAE Manufacturer’s manufacturing facilities shall be certified ISO-
9000:2000 operations, utilize ISO-9000:2000 manufacturing
procedures and maintain their ISO certifications.
3. CAE Manufacturer shall employ at a minimum the following
methods for QA of component and assembly devices.
a) Visual inspection of devices shall be performed to verify
assembly according to defined procedures. End of line
operational tests shall be performed to ensure product
functionality has been correctly configured. A system burn-in
period shall be utilized to screen for early life failures of
electronic components.
4. Individual functionality and system level regression testing shall be
performed to ensure compliance with product specifications. Single
and multiple unit system tests shall be performed to mimic end-user
installation configurations. Automated hardware and software
testing shall be utilized to evaluate system performance under
published operational loads and shall be compared to published
system capabilities.
B. Bidder Qualifications (Stanley Security Systems currently maintains the
existing card access systems for CIT)
1. At the time of the bid, the bidder shall have satisfactorily completed
projects similar size, scope and complexity as the system detailed
in this specification. The bidder shall furnish written proof of
experience from three (3) references and proof of current
accreditation/certification by the manufacturer for required training
for sales/installation/service of the SMS and associated devices.
2. The bidder shall also be a factory authorized local service
organization that shall carry a complete stock of parts and provide
maintenance for the SMS and related systems under this contract.
Local shall be defined as an area in a (**X) mile radius of installed
location.)
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. SMS Field Hardware:
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 3 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
1. Best Access
B. Card Readers
1. HID
2.2 INTELLIGENT SYSTEM CONTROLLER (ISC)
A. The Intelligent System Controller (ISC) shall link the SMS Software to all
“down-stream” field hardware components (Reader Interface Modules,
Input Control Modules and Output Control Modules). The ISC shall
provide full distributed processing of access control / Alarm Monitoring
rules and operations. A fully loaded and configured ISC with shall respond
in less than one-half (0.5) second to grant or deny access to cardholder.
B. The ISC shall continue to function normally (stand-alone) in the event that
it loses communication with the SMS software. While in this off-line state,
the ISC shall make access granted/denied decisions and maintain a log of
the events that have occurred. Events shall be stored in local memory,
and then uploaded automatically to the SMS database after
communication has been restored.
C. In addition, the ISC shall incorporate the following features:
1. UL 294, ULC, and CE Certified
2. Support for Host Communications Speed of 38,400 bps
3. Support for Direct Connect, Remote Dial Up, or Local Area Network
(LAN) Connection
4. Support for up to .5 MB of On-Board Memory
5. LAN Support shall utilize RJ45 (10/100baseT) Ethernet Interface or
Token Ring 4 MB connectivity
6. Flash Memory for real time program updates and overall host
communications
7. Support for four 2 wire downstream ports, two 4 wire downstream
ports, or combination one 4 wire downstream port and two 2 wire
downstream ports. Downstream ports shall be for connecting card
readers and data gathering and output control panels via RS-485
multi-drop wiring configuration
8. Memory storage of up to 12,500 cardholders with 4 MB memory
expansion.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 4 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
9. Initial base memory download between ISC with standard memory
from the SMS shall require no more than ten (10) seconds
10. Support for up to 16 devices consisting of RIMs, ICMs, and OCMs
in any combination desired with a maximum of 8 I/OCM devices per
ISC
11. Support of multiple card technologies
12. Supervised Communications between ISC and SMS Software
13. AES 128 bit Symmetrical Block Encryption conforming to the FIPS-
197 standard between ISC and SMS Software communications
driver.
14. Multi – drop support for up to eight ISCs per SMS communications
port
15. Support of up to eight card formats and facility codes
16. Support for SEIWG card formats
17. RS-485 Full Duplex, UL 1076 Grade AA communication channel to
the SMS head-end
18. Integration to other manufacturer’s card readers
19. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with battery backup for 2 hours
20. 32-bit Microprocessor
21. Biometric Interface Support
22. An ISC downstream serial port shall multi-drop 16 access control
field hardware devices using an RS-485 UL 1076 Grade A
communication format allowing a distance of 4,000 feet using
Belden 9842 cable or equivalent
23. 12 VAC or 12 VDC input power
24. Issue Code Support for both Magnetic and Wiegand Card Formats
25. Individual Shunt Times (ADA Requirement)
26. Up to Nine Digit PIN Codes
27. Downstream serial RS-232 device support
28. Status LEDs for normal component and communication status
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 5 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
29. RoHS Compliance
30. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable
2.3 INPUT CONTROL MODULE (ICM)
A. The Input Control Module shall provide 16 UL 1076 Grade B, A or AA
alarm input zones and monitor / report line fault conditions, alarm
conditions, power faults and tampers. Status LEDs shall provide
information about the sixteen alarm zone inputs, cabinet tamper, and
power fault.
B. In addition, the ICM shall incorporate the following features:
1. UL 294, ULC, and CE Certified
2. Alarm contact status scanning at up to 180 times per second for
each zone
3. Eight configuration DIP switches to assign unit addresses and
communications speed
4. Elevator control support for 128 floors
5. Variable resistor values for line supervision
6. A low power CMOS microprocessor
7. Filtered data for noise rejection to prevent false alarms
8. Up to 16 Grade B, A, or AA Supervised Inputs in any Combination
9. 12 or 24 VDC Input Power
10. 2 Form C 5A, 30 VDC Contacts for load switching
11. 2 dedicated inputs for tamper and power status
12. RoHS Compliance
13. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable
2.4 OUTPUT CONTROL MODULE (OCM)
A. The Output Control Modules shall provide 16 Form-C 5A 30 VDC relay
contacts for load switching. The relays shall be configurable for fail-safe or
fail-secure operation. Each relay shall support “On” “Off” and “Pulse”
1. 12 or 24 VDC input power
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 6 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
2. Two dedicated digital inputs for tamper and power failure status
3. RS-485 communications, multi-dropped (2-wire or 4-wire RS-485)
4. Up to 16 OCMs per Intelligent System Controller
5. Onboard termination jumpers
6. DIP switch selectable addressing
7. Status LEDs for communication to the host, heartbeat and relay
status
8. Elevator control, support for 64 floors
9. RoHS Compliance
10. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable
2.5 SINGLE READER INTERFACE MODULE (SRI)
A. The SRI shall provide an interface between the ISC and authentication
devices. The SRI must operate with any authentication device that
produces a standard Wiegand, Data 1 / Data 0) or Clock and Data
communication output.
B. In addition the SRI shall incorporate the following features:
1. 12 or 24 VDC power supply
2. Reader communications (Clock/Data or Wiegand Data1/Data0) -
more than 150 different readers approved for use
3. Two Form-C relay outputs (5 A Door Strike and 1 A Aux relays)
4. Up to 16 different card formats (8 card and 8 asset)
5. Issue code support for Magnetic and Wiegand formats
6. Door contact Open or Closed, Supervised or Non-supervised
7. REX push-button monitor - Supervised or Non-supervised
8. Strike Control output
9. Dedicated tamper and power failure circuits
10. Bicolor or two wire status LED support
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 7 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
11. Beeper control
12. Support for offline reader access mode
13. Elevator control, support for 64 floors
14. UL 294 listed and CE approved
15. RoHS Compliance
16. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable
2.6 DUAL READER INTERFACE MODULE (DRI)
A. The DRI shall provide a dual interface between the ISC and authentication
devices. The DRI must operate with any authentication device that
produces a standard Wiegand (Data 1 / Data 0 or Clock and Data)
communication output.
B. In addition the DRI shall incorporate the following features:
1. 12 or 24 VDC power supply
2. Reader communications (Clock/Data or Wiegand Data1/Data0) -
more than 150 different readers approved for use
3. Six Form-C 5 A at 30 VDC relay outputs
4. Up to 16 different formats (8 card and 8 asset)
5. Issue code support for Magnetic and Wiegand formats
6. Door contact supervision (Open/Closed)
7. REX push-button monitor
8. Strike Control output
9. Bi-color status LED support and 2-wire LED support
10. Beeper control
11. Dedicated tamper and power failure circuits
12. Support for offline reader access mode
13. Onboard jumpers for termination
14. Onboard jumpers for 5 VDC or 12 VDC reader support
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 8 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
15. Elevator control, native support for 6 floors
16. DIP switch selectable addressing
17. UL 294 listed and CE approved
18. RoHS Compliance
19. Support for RS-485 over CAT 5, 6e cable
2.7 CARDS
A. The system will be operated with the University’s’ existing HID compatible
proximity cards.
2.8 CARD READER LOCK (CRL)
A. HID compatible 125Khz proximity reader
B. Compatible with cards, reader interface module and SMS software
C. Green/red – Multi-colored LED
D. Mortise lock
E. New Locks shall be Seargent Lever (LL)
F. Locks shall be storeroom locks (04)
G. Shall accommodate Best small format 7 pin interchangeable core prefix 70
for Best.
H. Locks shall be fail secure
I. Tamper resistant mounting
J. Integral request to exit door position switch and solenoid controlled lock
K. Read range 6”
L. Shall be installed by a Harmony certified installer
M. Sargent Harmony series
2.9 DOOR CONTACTS (DC)
A. Integral to CRL on new doors
B. Flush mount
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 9 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
C. Form c contact
D. Magnetic strength suitable for metal doors and frames.
E. Door Contacts shall be Sentrol 1078
2.10 MORTISE MOUNT ELECTRONIC EPT (NEW DOORS)
A. Used for flush mount wired connections to the Card Reader Lock on new
doors.
B. 12 conducter #22 awg with Electrolinx connectors.
C. Magnetic strength suitable for metal doors and frames.
D. Design Make: Securitron EL-CEPT Power Transfer
2.11 SURFACE MOUNT ELECTRONIC EPT (EXISTING DOORS)
A. Used for surface mount wired connections to the Card Reader Lock on
existing doors.
B. Use pre-terminated quick connect (McKinney ElectroLynx) plug-and-play
kit with 15’ of cable
Specify Keedex part #: K-DL38A24 door to frame power transfer flex
conduit with box at each end. Cut connectors off one end of ElectroLynx
cable, fish raw cable end from the lock to the ceiling space and leave coil
for Stanley Technician to connect to power.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Installation:
1. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
2. Provide all wiring as required by the manufacturer. Provide plenum
rated cable as required.
B. Programming of the system shall include the following tasks:
1. Coordinate all system programming and configuration with the
facility’s security maintenance staff.
2. Programming system configuration parameters (hardware and
software, reader/circuit numbers, communication parameters).
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP ACCESS CONTROL
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 13 00 – PAGE 10 OF 10
MARCH 29, 2013
3. Programming operational parameters such as the card holder
database, time zones, access levels and reader definitions.
4. Programming passcodes according to the authorities and functions
defined by the Owner.
5. Other system programming tasks required by the Owner. These
additional programming requirements shall be coordinated between
the Owner, security maintenance staff and the contractor.
C. Testing:
1. Operational Testing: The contractor shall perform thorough
operational testing and verify that all system components re fully
operational.
2. Hard-copy System Printout: The contractor shall submit a hard-
copy system printout of all components tested and certify 100
percent operation indicating all devices/panels/units have passed
the test criteria set forth by the manufacturer.
3.2 CARD READER
A. Install card readers in locations shown on plans. Install readers past the
swing of the door.
B. Provide surface mount back boxes only where needed. Where possible
provide flush mount back boxes that can be covered by the card reader.
When needed the door jam or a hallow wall can be used as the junction
point for the card reader connections.
3.3 COMMISSIONING
A. The contractor shall certify completion in writing and schedule the
commissioning walk-through. The contractor shall provide all the tools
and personnel needed to conduct an efficient commissioning process.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide a 1 year parts and labor warranty for all equipment and software
provided in this section.
END OF SECTION
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 1 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
SECTION 28 07 10
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This document includes a general description, functional requirements,
operational characteristics, and criteria for the Security Management
System (SMS).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The Codes and Regulations listed below form a part of this specification to
the extent referenced. Work shall be performed in accordance with the
applicable international, federal, state, and local codes or standards
current at the commencement of installation. The following list
summarizes applicable standards:
1. UL 294, UL 1076, ULC
2. CE
3. FCC – Part 15, Part 68
4. NFPA 70, NEC
5. IEEE, RS 170 variable standard
6. IEEE, NTSC (color camera broadcast)
7. PAL (color camera broadcast, Europe)
8. CCIR (monochrome standard, Europe)
9. Microsoft® Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface)
10. ISO Software Coding Standards for C++ and C##
11. RoHS
B. Where more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent
shall apply.
C. Cable installation, identification and termination shall be performed in
.addition to the applicable codes above.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 2 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
1.3 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Security Management System (SMS) outlined in this section and
detailed in Part 2 of this document is the key central component for
managing physical security and the bridge between physical and logical
security for this project. The system shall provide a variety of integral
functions including the ability to regulate access and egress; provide
identification credentials; monitor, track and interface alarms; and view,
record and store digital surveillance video linked to SMS events.
B. The SMS shall utilize a single seamlessly integrated relational database
for all functions utilizing a fully multi-tasking multi-threading Microsoft
Windows 2000/2003 or Windows XP Operating System. The SMS shall be
written so that all modules (Access Control, Alarm Monitoring, ID /
Credential Management, Visitor Management, Asset Management and
Digital Video Management) are developed and built from a unified single
32-bit source code set.
C. Upgrades or expansion of the SMS to a larger size system in scale shall
not require installation of a different and or new SMS application or require
the administrator/operator to learn a different and or new interface from
the previous version.
D. The SMS software shall be written to Microsoft's published standards for
User Interface Design, Secure Coding Practices and Database
Implementation Guidelines (Microsoft® Open Database Connectivity
(ODBC) interface).
E. The SMS software shall be written to ISO Standards on Software
Development for C++ and C##.
F. The SMS shall be able to seamlessly interface with and monitor intelligent
system controllers, reader interface modules, I/O panels, burglar alarm
panels, burglar alarm panel receivers, biometric devices, personal
protection devices, intercom systems, and digital video recorders
approved for use by the SMS manufacturer.
G. The SMS shall be able to communicate with intelligent system controllers
via RS-485, RS-232, TCP-IP/Ethernet and Dial-up via Modem.
H. All tasks shall be accessible from any compatible client workstation on the
network utilizing one or all of the following:
1. Traditional client server architecture
2. N-tier architecture where the SMS shall support the expansion of
the system architecture and allow for end-user deployment based
upon their system architectural needs. The SMS shall allow but not
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 3 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
require the separation of the database, application server, web
server and client interface. The system shall require that all
connections to the database are performed through a trusted link
from the client or internet browser interface.
3. Centralized distribution (publishing) of applications using Windows
Terminal Server and Citrix on Windows, Unix, Linux or Apple
Macintosh based systems through any compatible internet browser
application and/or by means of a mobile computing platform using a
wearable computer, Tablet PC or PDA device.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. Manufacturer of the SMS shall be an established organization with
referenced and documented experience delivering and maintaining
Security Management Systems of equal or higher sophistication
and complexity as compared to the system detailed in this
specification.
2. SMS Manufacturer’s manufacturing facilities shall be certified ISO-
9000:2000 operations, utilize ISO-9000:2000 manufacturing
procedures and maintain their ISO certifications.
3. SMS Manufacturer shall employ at a minimum the following
methods for QA of component and assembly devices.
a) Visual inspection of devices shall be performed to verify
assembly according to defined procedures. End of line
operational tests shall be performed to ensure product
functionality has been correctly configured. A system burn-in
period shall be utilized to screen for early life failures of
electronic components.
4. Individual functionality and system level regression testing shall be
performed to ensure compliance with product specifications. Single
and multiple unit system tests shall be performed to mimic end-user
installation configurations. Automated hardware and software
testing shall be utilized to evaluate system performance under
published operational loads and shall be compared to published
system capabilities.
B. Bidder Qualifications
1. At the time of the bid, the bidder shall have satisfactorily completed
projects similar size, scope and complexity as the system detailed
in this specification. The bidder shall furnish written proof of
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 4 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
experience from three (3) references and proof of current
accreditation/certification by the manufacturer for required training
for sales/installation/service of the SMS and associated devices.
2. The bidder shall also be a factory authorized local service
organization that shall carry a complete stock of parts and provide
maintenance for the SMS and related systems under this contract.
Local shall be defined as an area in a 50 mile radius of installed
location.)
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. SMS Hardware and Software
1. Design Make: Best Access (now Stanley) BASIS
2.2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SERVER (EXISTING)
A. All card access components shall be compatible with the Universities
existing Head-End Database server. The existing server supports Best
Access systems’ BASIS software.
2.3 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CLIENT WORKSTATION (EXISTING)
A. All card access components shall be compatible with the Universities
existing Client workstations. The existing workstations support Best
Access systems’ BASIS software.
2.4 SMS SOFTWARE CAPABILITIES
A. The SMS Software shall support an unlimited number of card readers,
input points, video cameras, door monitoring points, and relay outputs.
The SMS database server shall support an unlimited number of
cardholders, visitors, and assets limited only by the available memory on
the ISC. The database server shall also support an unlimited number of
system events and System Operator transactions in the history file limited
only by available hard disk space. Client Workstations shall be limited only
by the limitations of the operating system server software.
2.5 SMS SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY
A. Existing CIT SMS Client workstation to allow the following:
1. Local history review of CIT Card History.
2. Receipt of alarms located in the CIT area.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 5 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Installation:
1. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. Programming of the system shall include the following tasks:
1. Coordinate all system programming and configuration with the
facility’s security maintenance staff.
2. Programming system configuration parameters (hardware and
software, reader/circuit numbers, communication parameters).
3. Programming operational parameters such as the card holder
database, time zones, access levels and reader definitions.
4. Programming passcodes according to the authorities and functions
defined by the Owner.
5. Other system programming tasks required by the Owner. These
additional programming requirements shall be coordinated between
the Owner, security maintenance staff and the contractor.
C. Testing:
1. Operational Testing: The contractor shall perform thorough
operational testing and verify that all system components are fully
operational.
2. Hard-copy System Printout: The contractor shall submit a hard-
copy system printout of all components tested and certify 100
percent operation indicating all devices/panels/units have passed
the test criteria set forth by the manufacturer.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. The contractor shall certify completion in writing and schedule the
commissioning walk-through. The contractor shall provide all the tools
and personnel needed to conduct an efficient commissioning process.
3.3 WARRANTY
A. Provide a one year parts and labor warranty on all equipment and
software in this section.
ARCHI-TECHNOLOGY
CORNELL – NCP SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 28 07 10 – PAGE 6 OF 6
MARCH 29, 2013
END OF SECTION